Home

Compact Plus System Administration Guide

Contents

1. Show extn _ Line access Show F Next Line Pool access Enter extension then F Show Line Pool A Show k Show Line Pool B Next Terminals amp Exins or F Show Line Pool C rmi x Panow Next F Next Prime line Capabilities Sh to go through a list of eae RON Next Intercom keys Next telephones F Next Answer extns gt Next k Show Show extn Lines Show Show line F Show 221 F Next OLI Enter line number or Name Next gt Next Next Fwd no answer Services Show 10 ge through a list of k Show Fwd to User Prefernces Show F Next Fwd on busy F Show Fwd to Next Show Next DND on busy TT Next F Next Handsfree ys SP ane k Next HF on answerback Restrictions Show k Next Pickup grp Next Next Fk Next Page zone Fk Next Paging Next Passwords Restrictions
2. Feature To activate To cancel Contrast adjustment Z Dialling modes BJe Do Not Disturb 8 6 6J6 Group listen 8 0 e B 0 E Hold Holding a call exclusively 7 9 Key Inquiry 0 Last Number Redial 5 Line pools 64 Line redirection 8 4 18 4 not available o T7100 or an M7100N Logit Call Logs 8 6 Long tones B 06 Memory keys Programming 8 or 2 or im Erasing A then ok Messages Reply 6 6 6 6 Sending E HO View messages 6 Moving line keys 6 ft E Page General 6 Internal 6 fi External 6 e Internal and external 6 B Pause 718 Priority call 6 To block a Priority call 8 Privacy Jeg Daaa Programmed Release 8 P P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 308 Feature quick reference Feature To activate To cancel Recall rfi Ring Again 2 E Ring Type 6 Ring Volume 8 Run Stop B Saved Number Redial 6J Services Ringing service BI7 A HB Restriction service HBe Routing service B Z 8 Show Time and Date 8 0 8 Static Time C8 B8 0 E6 C8 6 0 6 System Wide Call to Appearance SWCA Move clock forward by 1 8 6 6 hour Move clock back by 1 hour
3. P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 216 About your system telephones M7310N key assignments for dual memory keys all templates 8 x 24 system 8 x 16 system Extn 240 Ex n 233 n 227 n 221 Extn 233 Extn 221 Blank Extn 227 Extn 234 Extn 222 Extn 235 Ex Extn 241 Extn 228 Ex n 242 Ex Extn 234 Extn 222 EX Extn 235 Blank Extn 228 Blank Extn 223 in 229 n 223 n 229 Extn 236 n 243 n 236 Extn 224 Extn 230 Extn 224 Extn 237 Exin 244 Extn 237 Ex Blank Extn 230 ank B n 225 n 231 n 225 n 231 n 245 Ex Extn 239 Extn 226 Extn 232 EX Blank Extn 232 M7208N T7208 telephones These telephones have a single line display eight memory keys with indicators and Handsfree capability Line 1 Line 1 Line Pool Line 2 Line Pool Pick Up Last No Last No Last No Page Page Page Spd Dial Spd Dial Spd Dial Conf tran Conf tran Conf tran Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom The defaults shown may not actually occur on any telephone as no telephone has an Autodial key for itself The extension number for
4. Square template T7316 BST lower buttons Button Function Button Function 11 Set 221 13 Set 222 15 Set 223 _ 01 Line i 02 Line2 03 Call Fwd_ 04 Pick Up 05 Page i PBX template 11 Set 221 17 Set 224 13 Set 222 19 Set 225 15 Set 223 21 Set 226 01ND 06 Confftrans_ 02 Transfer 07 Last No 03 Call Fwd 08 Voice Call 04 Pick Up 09 Intercom 05 Page 10 Intercom 11 Set221_ 13 Set 222 15 Set223 01 Linet e 02 Line pool _ 03 Call Fwd 17 Set 224 19 Set 225 21 Set 226 06 07 09 10 Intercom Hybrid template 04 Pick Up M7324N telephone and CAPN The M7324N telephone has a two line display three display keys 24 memory keys with indicators and Handsfree capability 05 Page 17 Set 224 19 Set 225 21 Set 226 06 07 08 09 Intercom 10 Intercom M7324N memory key assignments Conf Trans Last No 08 Voice Call Intercom Conf Trans Last No Voice Call Square mea Call Fwa Conf Line 1 CallFwd Conf Blank Call Fwd Conf Spd Dial Transfer Line Pool Spd Dial Transfer Blank Spd Dial Transfer Blank LastNo _ DND Blank Last No OND Blank astN
5. 116 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 112 Programming User preferences Programming User preferences The User preferences section of programming allows you to programme memory keys speed dial codes and other settings for any Norstar BST telephone on the system For example an employee may want to have the Do Not Disturb feature programmed to a memory key or create a speed dial code Instead of programming from that employee s telephone you can enter User preferences on the nearest telephone to make the change See Chart 13 User preferences on page 326 for a programming overview You can copy User preferences settings from one extension to another whenever COF appears on the display The only programming that does not get copied is key programming between different models of telephone Changing the key programming for an extension If there is one or more key on a particular model of telephone that you would like to change you can customise one key at a time 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ektns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press Show _
6. 298 e Programmed Release 299 e Recall 299 e Run Stop 299 e Wait for Dial Tone 300 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 298 Special dialling features Special dialling features Norstar BST telephones can access a remote system or dial a number on a private network by using host system access features such as Recall Pause Wait for Dial Tone and Run Stop These features either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to programme delays required by host systems to external Autodial keys or Speed Dial codes Inserting a pause The Pause feature enters a 3 5 second delay in a dialling sequence on an exchange line You may need this for signalling remote devices such as answering machines or when dialling through to PBX features or host systems You can programme more than one pause in an external Autodial or Speed Dial sequence For pulse dialling inserts a 1 5 second pause into the dialling sequence The pause symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialling sequence Press while programming a dialling sequence Note You can obtain a pause with one key press if you programme the feature code to a memory key More than one pause can be programmed to an external Autodial key Setting Long tones The Long tones feature allows you to control the length of a tone so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines
7. Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 95 7 8 9 10 11 13 Preventing Recall Press Press Press Press Press 12 Next Show Next E Show Next until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters The display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow saved nas Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming The default setting allows an extension to use the Recall feature l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Press Press Press Press Press Show Next Show Next Show Next The display shows Line access until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters until the display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow recall Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus S
8. Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Changing the time and date using the Basic password You can change the time and date using 6 TIME and the Basic password 1 Press 6 B TIME The display shows Password i Press 2 2 7 4 BASIC The display shows Hour 3 Press CHAHGE or HEST if you do not need to change the hour Enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the display shows AM Press CHANGE to select PM 5 Press HEXT The display shows Minutes 7 8 9 10 11 Press CHANGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the minutes Enter the minutes 00 to 59 Press HEXT The display shows Yeari Press CHANGE or HEXT if you do not need to change the year Enter the last two digits of the current year Press HEXT The display shows Months P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 74 Changing the time and date 12 Press CHANGE or HEXT if there is no change 13 Enter the month 01 to 12 14 Press HEXT The display shows Dasi 15 Press CHAHGE 16 Enter the day of the month 01 to 31 17 Press to exit Changing the time by an hour Norstar offers two features that allow you to adjust the time quickly for changes in British Standard Time Moving one hour forward with FWD 1 Press L B FWD The display shows Forward b a LHe 2 Press YES The display briefly shows Time Changed Mo
9. 49 e Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 51 e Room occupancy RO 52 e Room condition RC 53 e Service time 55 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide A8 Programming Hospitality Services Hospitality Services HS is a group of features that increases the value of the Compact Plus system in small to medium sized hotels motels or hospitals In a hotel setting guests gain improved services through immediate access to basic functions like e wake up service or reminders e accurate tracking of the room service requirements for example check in check out Hospitality Services features must be activated by qualified personnel using Software keycodes See Software Keys on page 58 Hospitality extensions Norstar BST extensions are classified as one of following types of telephones e Common extension A common extension can be a telephone found in a lobby office or common area It is not associated with a room A common extension does not have access to all HS features Common extensions are Norstar BST extensions or analogue telephones connected to an analogue terminal adapter ATA or to an analogue extension module AEM e Room extension A Room extension is a telephone assigned to a room in System programming Up to five telephones can be assigned to the same room they all share the same room number Room extension can be any Norstar BST extension
10. Invalid number Press a key QUIT Program and HOLD Program and OF QUIT OK Programmed Continue to enter digits until the number is complete Press the volume bar or EKSF to erase an incorrect digit Press or OK when you are finished The memory allotted to Autodial numbers in your Compact Plus system is full While programming external Autodial you erased the key by pressing or Ok before entering any digits Enter the number you wish to programme choosing the line first if necessary exactly as you would if you were making a call Enter the internal telephone number you wish to programme You are programming an internal Autodial key and have entered a number that is not an extension number on your system Enter a valid extension number If the number you are entering is a destination code use external Autodial Press the memory key you want to programme Enter the number you want to programme to the key then press Enter the number you want to programme to the key then press or Ok You may include a line or line pool selection in an Autodial sequence by selecting the line before entering any digits The number is stored on the key P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 282 Saving time with features Feature moved You have programmed an Autodial number to a key that had a feature code programmed The feature has moved to another key Use 0
11. 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Press Terri Press Press Press nals Extns Next _ until the display shows Fasswords Show _ The display shows COS Fswds Next _ until the display shows IRAD Fwd pk displayed only after BT has initialised the system through RACE with a password Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the old password Use the keypad to enter the new password Press OK to accept the new password 10 Use the keypad to re enter the new password for verification 11 The display shows IRAD FSi Hkk 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Call services e Erasing a forgotten Call log password 178 e Programming Call services 179 e 1st Display 179 e Auto called ID 180 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 178 Call services Erasing a forgotten Call log password If someone forgets their Call log password you can reset it to None so that they can set a new one You cannot set a new password using this method You can only erase an existing one See Call Log on page 290 for information on setting a new Call log password See Chart 21 Call Log passwords on page 332 in Appendix A for a programming overview l 4 5 6 7 8 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming t
12. Continue recording the remaining messages D G if desired Remember that some greetings are shared by both SA and CCR Ensure that the recording is appropriate for both features Press 1 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Auto Attendant 197 Programming or changing CCR destinations l Pe ie Press GB Jand enter 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Auto att 9rtnas Press HEXT The display shows CCE Tree Press SHOW The display shows Dial Att Press CHAHGE if you want to choose Attendant None CCR or grp Press HEST until the display shows Dial amp and the current destination when the caller presses zero Press CHAHGE to select the appropriate destination Each number from zero to nine and can direct a call to the attendant telephone or one of the nine CCR groups The can be set up to make the system play the CCR greeting again Repeat If a digit is set to None it has no destination Using HEXT and CHAHGE select the destinations for the remaining digits Testing your custom System Answer and CCR If you have more than one external line you can call in to hear your greetings by dialling the number used by external callers to call the attendant set or a line that is answered using CCR To call systems with only one external line you have to go to a telephone that is not connected to your system P0607114 Issue 01 Co
13. J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp extrs Press and enter the extension number whose programming you want to copy Press COPY The display shows Cors 54 STEM data Press CHAHGE to toggle between SYSTEM data to copy the programming of the system and SYSTEM USER to copy the programming of the system and the programming of a particular extension Press Next The display shows Cory 5IHGLE Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Moving and copying 149 10 11 12 13 14 Press CHAHGE to select either a range of extensions or all extensions Press Next The display shows Only eauirrd Ext Press CHANGE to switch between equipped extensions and all extensions Press Next The display shows Begin ats Enter the starting extension number The display shows End ate Enter the ending extension number The display shows NAR hIFII MrT Press OK to copy the programming to the specified extensions You can leave the programming session even if the copy has not been completed If you exit programming copying continues uninterrupted until it is complete Depending on the activities going on in the system a copy may take some time to take effect The brief display you see once you have finished a copying session does not indicate the process is complete Event codes capture both the start and completion of the copying process System settings you c
14. Press Next The display shows Stor time Press CHAHGE and enter the time you want the schedule to stop Press OK to accept a m or CHAHGE to accept p m Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Passwords e Password security 172 e Setting the SAPLUS password 172 e Setting the Administrator password 173 e Setting the Basic password 173 e Hospitality passwords 174 e RAD password 175 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 172 Passwords Password security You can and should change your passwords regularly for security reasons Keep a record of your passwords in a secure place and remember that the longer the password the more likely it is to be secure See Chart 20 Passwords on page 331 in Appendix A for a programming overview Setting the SAPLUS password The System Administrator Plus password is one to six digits long and allows you to access all the programming needed to set up the system for your company The default password is 7 2 7 7 which spells SAPLUS on the keypad 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next four tim
15. Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 B 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Auto Attendant Press Show _ The display shows Attd extn Press Next _ The display shows System answer Press Show _ The display shows After Press CHAHGE to choose 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 or 12 rings 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR greeting If the system is busy answering calls the line rings until CCR can retrieve the call l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 8 J 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Ek tns Press Next _Juntil the display shows System Frarmina Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Auto Attendant 193 wenn Press Show _ The display shows Auto Attendant Press Show _ The display shows Attd extn Press Next J until the display shows CCF Press Show _ The display shows After Press CHAHGE to choose 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 or 12 rings 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group The greeting you
16. Programming feature settings 139 Directed call pickup Page tone The Directed pickup feature allows someone to pick up calls that are ringing at another telephone by entering 6 and the extension number You can enable or disable Directed pickup for the system The default is Yes which means that Directed pickup is enabled See Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup on page 240 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Nex until the display shows Directd rickur 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming You can choose whether a tone sounds before a page begins See Paging on page 270 for information on using the Paging feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows
17. The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Fr3rmina 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Show _ The display shows Show Srour 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 8 Press Show _ The display shows Member extns 9 Press Next until the display shows Timeout 10 Press CHAHGE to set the queue timeout 15 30 45 60 120 or 180 11 Press 6 to exit or Next _ to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 127 Programming the overflow extension You can programme which extension receives overflow calls If the overflow extension is a hunt group extension the call is considered a new call and joins the queue The overflow extension can be an extension number associated with a voice mailbox 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Esths Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 9rourt 4 5 6 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 8 9 Press Show The display shows Member extn Press Next until the display shows Overflow
18. The power fail telephone is an analogue telephone not a Norstar telephone that functions independently of the Compact Plus system You can use the power fail telephone only when your Norstar system is disconnected or without power The power fail telephone is usually located near the Compact Plus CCU If there is no power fail telephone next to the CCU plug a standard analogue telephone into the power fail telephone socket located near the CCU The power fail telephone facility is not supported on a BRI loop Norstar customers with digital exchange lines who require power fail telephones have the following options e Add analogue exchange lines to the system e Install an uninterruptable power supply UPS stand by power unit for the Compact Plus Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 SECTION Ill Using telephone features P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 208 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 About your system telephones e T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs 210 e T7316 Business Series Terminal key defaults 213 e M7324N telephone and CAPN 214 e M7310N telephone 215 e M7208N T 7208 telephones 216 e M7100N T7100 telephones 217 e M7000 T 7000 telephones 217 e Release key 218 e Visually Impaired Operator Console 218 e Common feature display mes
19. 00 No overrides Restrn flt 06 Restrn 01 lt ANY gt Deny lt ANY gt No overrides Exin restrns Filters Normal 02 Night 11 Evening 12 Lunch 13 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Extn lock None Partial Full Allow last no Y Allow saved no Y Allow link Y Allow redirect N Line extn rstrns Show line _ Normal None Night None Evening None Lunch None Sched 4 None Sched 5 None Sched 6 None Call Services Auto call info Show line _ Caller ID set N Default for DIA Y Call log set N Default for DIA Y 1stDisplay Name Numb Line Auto called ID N Log space Log 0 Pool 250 Name Line001 Restrictions lines Restrn filters 00 99 Show filter _ Restrn fit 00 No restrictions Restrn flt 01 Restrn 01 Deny 0 Override 001 0800 Restrn 02 Deny 1 Override 001 No overrides Restrn fit 05 Restrn 01 010 Deny 010 No overrides Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides Restrn 03 00 Deny 00 No overrides Restrn flt 06 Restrn 01 lt ANY gt Deny lt ANY gt No overrides Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 27 Line restrns Normal 03 Night 21 Evening 22 Lunch 23 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Remote restrns Normal 04 Night 31 Evening 32 Lunch 33 Sched 4 00 Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Ringing service Ringing groups 01 20 Show group _ Ring grp 01 Show extension _ 221 Assigned all others Unassign Sched Night Servic
20. 30 60 120 180 300 600 2700 AutoTime amp Date Y SWCA Cnirls Auto Associate N Invoke by Hold N Call log space Reset all logs Host delay 1000 1000 to 7000 in 500 ms increments AlarmExtn 221 Extn relocation N Exch ring Preset Echo Msg reply enh N Ans Extn Basic Enhanced Extended CLID match 3 4 5 6 7 8 None Direct dial D Dial 1 Intrnl Extrn None Intrnl 221 Extrnl None Auto Attendant Auto attend Off On Attd extn 221 System Answer After 3 rings 2 to 12 CCR After 3 rings 2 to 12 CCR lines L001 Answer No Yes CCR groups Show group _ CCR grp 1 Show DN _ 221 Unassgnd Assigned Remote access Rem access pkgs 00 to 15 Show pkg _ LinePool access Pool A 9 N Remote page N Remote admin N Remote monitor N Rem line access Show line _ L001 Rem pkg 00 IRAD Answer line None After 5 ring 1 to 12 Rec d lengths Private length 3 1 7 Public length 3 1 7 Extn length 3 Intrl modem Fast Slow Alarm reporting Auto report Off On Phone 1 None Phone 2 None Use line None Retry time 15 Num retries 5 0 to 9 Hospitality Room desk info Show extn __ Room _ Adm pwd req d Y Call restrns Vacant 00 Use fit I Base 00 Mid 00 Full 00 Service time Hour 00 Minutes 00 Alarm Attn attempts 3 I Retry intrvl 3 Attn duration 15 Time format 12hr 24hr Expired Alarms Notify extn None Use tone N Network Services ETSI Network Diversion N
21. Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Using personal features 231 Personal Speed Dial codes You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have been programmed onto Speed Dial codes Speed Dial codes e 001 to 255 are programmed for the entire system using the settings under System Speed Dialing heading These codes are valid for any telephone that is allowed to use speed dialing keys See Assigning a number to a System speed dial code on page 62 e 256 279 may be programmed differently at each telephone by the user These can also be programmed by you as part of the telephone programming and changed by the user as needed Speed dial numbers are generally subject to any call barring restrictions that have been programmed in the Modular Plus system Using Speed Dial System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign three digit Speed Dial codes to the external numbers your colleagues call most frequently Personal Speed Dial programming allows individuals to programme their own Speed Dial numbers Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as regularly dialled numbers You can programme system Speed Dial numbers to bypass dialling restrictions Speed Dial numbers may include host system signalling codes Note There is no difference between using Personal Speed Dial and using System Speed Dial They differ only in how you programme them and in the code range available
22. I MCID N Software Keys SysID 8 digits Password keys Key 1 8 digits Key 2 8 digits Key 3 8 digits Maintenance System version Clear lines Sys admin log Usage Metrics Hunt groups Show group _ HG lt n gt metrics Clear Time amp Date of last clear TotalCalls nnnnn Ans nnnnn nnn Avg ans nn sec Abndn nnnnn nnn Busy nnnnn nnn Ovrfl nnnnn nnn Avg Q nnn sec Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 29 Using passwords Programming access is controlled by four passwords The following tables show the items that can be programmed when using the System Administrator Plus password or the Installer password allows you to see and change any item in programming System Administrator Plus password provides knowledgeable users with access to all but a few sensitive areas of programming Administrator password used to view and change the settings that are part of day to day administration of the Norstar system Basic password only used with a limited number of feature codes to change programming and control system services Administrator password The IRAD password will appear only if BT has authorised its use after making a remote access RACE connection and changing the default IRAD password Programming using the SAPLUS password Terminals amp Extns Sys speed dial Software Keys Line access SysID Capabilities Passwords Password keys Nam
23. Note Each group telephone must either have a line appearance of the call coming in or a free intercom button to be able to retrieve a SWCA call from Hold The number of SWCA keys that can be assigned will depend on available buttons on the telephone M7310N T7316 T7316E and M7324N telephones provide the broadest use of this feature Companion and M7100N T7100 telephones do not have line or intercom buttons therefore they cannot be assigned SWCA buttons However they can be used to park and unpark SWCA calls by entering the codes on the dial pad to enter the SWCA code for a call Your system administrator configures the SWCA line buttons during the initial configuration of your telephone Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Answering calls 237 Auto Hold Call Park Your telephone must be set to have Full autohold if you want to use SWCA lines so that a call automatically gets placed on hold if the user answers a second call If the telephone does not do this the user can change the system setting at the telephone using B The Call Park access code must be active for SWCA buttons to work This means that it cannot be set to 0 Incoming calls When you answer a non intercom call the system can be set so that calls are automatically transferred to the first available SWCA key Or it can be set to two manual states whereby the call does not get transferred to a SWCA line key until the call
24. Rem access pkgs The symbol means Press For example Show Show pkg Press Show Press Next or Press Heading F Next Rem line access F Show Show line Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 SECTION Il System programming P0607114 Issue O1 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 24 Conventions used in this guide This section describes the programming choices available to assist you in designing a system that is efficient for your business When you see a numbered symbol 1 it represents the numbers on the telephone keypad A lettered symbol A represents the letters on the telephone keypad ___J represents a telephone key Keys shown like this Ce J are found on the Business Series Terminals telephones Four keys Heading _ Show he and are labelled on the programming overlay and represent the temporary use of keys during programming A word shown like this OK indicates the action of the display key located directly below on the display of two line display telephones All default settings appear in bold in the procedures For example if the default setting is none it appears as None Programming overview Use programming to change default settings as required Default settings for the PBX template are shown in bold in the programming map on page 26 Headings and sub headings in programming help you to know where you are Programming has the following main heading
25. The value shown is the average time in seconds the call waited in the queue to a maximum of 999 16 Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 130 Programming Hunt groups Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming feature settings e Background music 132 e On hold 132 e Receiver volume 133 e Camp timeout 133 e Park timeout 134 e Park mode 135 e Transfer callback 136 e Network callback 137 e Conference tone 138 e Directed call pickup 139 e Page tone 139 e Page timeout 140 e Call log space 140 e Alarm extension 141 e Answer extension 142 e Setting SWCA controls 143 e CLID Match 144 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 132 Programming feature settings Background music This feature allows people to listen to music through their telephone speakers if an external music source has been installed The default is No which means that Background music is disabled See Background music on page 132 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press Termi 4 Pre
26. You have entered an invalid feature code You have tried to use a feature that is not available in the present set up of your Compact Plus system You cannot use the feature you have chosen because your telephone is locked See Locking an extension on page 93 Press or press WIEW or lt WIEW to view a number that is too long to fit on the display Press or OK when you are finished This indicates a long distance call May be available with Call Display services Either you are receiving an internal call from telephone 239 forwarded by telephone 221 or you have an answer button for telephone 221 and an internal call from 239 is ringing on 221 You are connected to an internal call Press TRAHSFEF to transfer the call You are receiving a call from telephone 221 You have received a Ring Again offer for a call to an internal telephone Press the flashing internal line button or YES to call the number again On T7100 M7100N and T7000 M7000 telephones just lift the receiver Otherwise press H or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire For an explanation of Ring Again see Using Ring Again on page 284 The person to whom you camped the call did not answer it The call has come back to you Press the line button or CALLBACK to reconnect to the call You are connected to an external call Press TRAHSFER to transfer the call Either you are receiving an external call for
27. feature codes 311 system tones 154 used off site 155 used on site 155 Answer keys assigning 44 using 242 answering calls Call Pickup 240 external 234 hunt group calls 235 internal 234 queued 235 Trunk Answer 241 ATA See Analogue Terminal Adapter attendant phone choosing 191 Index Auto Attendant 188 Autobumping feature 295 Autodial external number 280 internal number 280 using intercom key 280 Automatic Telephone Relocation 146 auxiliary ringer programming 109 B Background Music On hold 132 programming 132 using 230 Barring calls using restriction filters 80 Basic password 173 British Telecom address 38 Broadcast 124 button defaults T7316 Business Series Terminal 213 T7316E Business Series Terminal 210 C Call barring using restriction filters 80 Call Camping feature 254 Call capture settings that enhance 31 72 37 Call Duration Timer 288 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 335 Index 336 Call Forward All Calls 35 Call Forward All Calls ISDN 309 Call Forward No Answer setting up 98 Call Forward on Busy setting up 100 Call holding 246 Call Information symbols 290 viewing 289 Call Log Autobumping 295 erasing password 178 feature 290 Logit 292 password 291 programming 294 selecting options 114 setting extension 291 viewing 292 Call Park 250 Call Pickup directed 240 group 241 Call Pickup Directed programming 139 Call queuing 235 Call Routing 160 Ca
28. 00 None User flt None 00 to 99 Line flt None 00 to 99 Remote pkg None 00 to 15 Call log pswds Show extn _ Log pswd None Progrming pswds Installer 266344 CONFIG SysAdmin 727587 SAPLUS Sys admin 23646 ADMIN Basic 22742 BASIC Hospitality I Desk pswd 4677 HOSP Cond None Time amp Date Hour 01 Minutes 00 I Year 01 Month 01 Day 01 System prgrming Hunt groups Show grp _ HGn lt DN gt Members O1 lt extn gt Appr only Appr amp Ring Ring only Line assignment Show line _ Lnnn Unassigned Assigned Mode Sequential Cyclic Broadcast Hunt delay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 If busy busyTone overflow queue Q Timeout 15 30 45 60 120 180 Overflow _ lt extension gt Name HGn _ lt 7 characters gt I Aux ringer N Dsinct ring None 2 3 4 Change extns Old extn _ Max 7 digits New extn _ Max 7 digits PO607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Featr settings Backgrnd music N On hold Tones Music Silence Receiver volume Use sys volume Use extn volume Camp timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 Park timeout 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 600 Park Mode Lowest Cycle Trnsfr callbk Y Trnsfr callbk 3 4 5 6 12 Network callbk 15 30 45 60 90 DRT to prime Y DRT delay 1 2 3 4 6 EX EX Trf Conf Y Held reminder Y Remind delay 30 60 90 120 150 180 Confrence tone Y Directd pickup Y Page tone Y PageTimeout 15
29. 2666 Speed Dial Making a call 0 Storing a Speed Dial a code Transfer Jno Ema Transfer to RAD 8 mA Trunk Answer Ce Je elo Voice call 6 6 Voice Call Deny B B 4 B B Wait for Dial Tone BJO A Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Feature quick reference 309 ISDN terminal features The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used from an ISDN terminal connected to Norstar On most ISDN terminals you need to press one or more keys to access feature services before you enter the feature code for these features To see what keys to press consult the instructions that came with the ISDN terminal Note Although ISDN terminals may have Transfer and Call Forward keys or display prompts these keys do not activate Compact Plus features Always use the appropriate procedure to access feature services then enter the feature code as described below Other Norstar BST extension features are not available to ISDN terminals In addition you cannot retrieve a parked call or use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension from an ISDN terminal Call Forward All Calls Transfer Using the Call Forward All Calls feature The Call Forward All Calls feature allows you to forward your calls to another telephone in your Compact Plus system 1 Press 4 J 2 Enter the number of the extension you want your calls forwarded to followed by f 3 Enter the appropria
30. 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows TerninalsteExtns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Fr3rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Srours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Back3rnd music H 8 Press Next until the display shows CLID match 8 9 Press CHAHGE to select the a number from 3 to 8 or select None if you do not require any number matching 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Moving and copying e Extension relocation 146 e Copying programming for telephones 147 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 146 Moving and copying Extension relocation The Extension relocation feature allows you to move a telephone from one extension socket to another without losing any of its custom programming or its assigned extension number By default Extension relocation is set to No Wait one minute between moves After moving a telephone wait one minute before moving the telephone a second time or changing the extension number for that telephone The CCU may take up to 60 seconds to recognise a telephone moved to a new location Do not connect another telephone to the old socket before relocating the telephone When moving a telephone with Extension relocation turned on do not con
31. 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Ternminals amp extrs Press until the display shows Usage Metrics Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show _ The display shows Show 9rour Enter the number of the hunt group you wish to view The display shows HG n gt metrics Press The display shows the date the information was last cleared Press Next The display shows TotalCalls The value shown is the total number of calls received by the hunt group to a maximum of 99999 Press Next The display shows An The values shown are the total number of calls that were answered and the percentage of answered calls to total calls Press Next The display shows Awa ans sec The value shown is the average time in seconds that it took to answer a call to a maximum of 999 Press Next The display shows Abndin The values shown are the number of abandoned calls and the percentage of abandoned calls to total calls Press Next The display shows Euzu The values shown are the number of times the hunt group was busy and the percentage of busy calls to total calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 129 14 Press Next The display shows Qverf 1 The values shown are the number of calls sent to the overflow position and the percentage of overflow calls to total calls 15 Press Next _ The display shows Ava Gisec
32. An attendant who has many calls coming in at once can use Call Queuing to help them answer the calls in order When there is more than one call ringing you can answer the call that has been ringing longest If you are already on an incoming call it is put on hold and the next longest waiting call is automatically connected 1 After you pick up the handset press 0 fj Answering hunt group calls The three hunt group distribution modes allow you to customise how hunt group calls are distributed in your office In Broadcast mode a single incoming call will ring simultaneously at all the extensions in a group In a busy office you might have three receptionists in a hunt group Each receptionist has a hunt group button on their telephone so incoming calls alert at all three telephones if available and can be answered by any one of the receptionists The other two telephones do not track the call The sequential distribution mode follows the programmed member order when distributing calls The incoming call starts at the first extension in the hunt group and directs the call through the hunt group members in order until a hunt group member answers the call The next hunt group call goes through the same distribution process In this mode you can programme your most experienced personnel to be the first members of the group to receive incoming calls P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 236 Answering ca
33. Extension restrictions on page 321 in Appendix A for a programming overview l On 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ek tns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next _ until the display shows Restrictions Press Show The display shows Restrn filters Press Next _ The display shows Extn restrns Press Show _ The display shows Filters Press Next _ until the display shows Allow last no Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue programming Preventing Saved Number Redial The default setting allows an extension to use the Saved Number Redial feature l 6 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access
34. External Link 6 Priority call Link 6 Privacy control Link 8 Reach through Recall Link 7 i Pause Link 7 8 Timed release Link 7 Restriction override Link 6 8 Ring Again Link 2 Link f 2 Saved Number Redial Link 6 7 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 312 Feature quick reference Feature To activate To cancel Send Message Link A Link Eaim StarTalk or Norstar Voice Mail Access mailbox Link p B f Leave a message Link 8 B 0 System Speed Dial Link 0 Tones Link 8 0J Link 1 B 0 P Transfer Link 7 0 Trunk Answer from any Link 8 0 fo telephone Voice call Link 6 6 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Appendix A Programming overviews P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 314 Appendix A Programming overviews Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts e Chart 1 System Speed Dial 316 e Chart 2 Naming extensions 316 e Chart 3 Naming lines 317 e Chart 4 Time and Date 317 e Chart 5 Direct Dial 318 e Chart 6 Restriction filters 319 e Chart 7 Remote Access Packages 320 e Chart 8 Extension restrictions 321 e Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 32
35. For example a sales manager who uses a DIA line to call clients may wish to have returned calls directed to an assistant The OLI programmed for the manager s extension is the Public Received number for the assistant s extension Thus a client viewing the CLID number on their telephone display sees the assistant s telephone number If the OLI number is set to None then the CLID displayed at the called party s telephone is a listed extension number for your Compact Plus system If the programmed OLI number is outside the allowed range Compact Plus may insert a default number 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswoard P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 46 Programming Terminals and Extensions 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment 7 Press until the display shows OLI 8 Press CHAHGE and enter the number 9 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Hospitality Services e Hospitality extensions 48 e Alarm time AL feature
36. Line redirection Redirect Ring Transfer Trunk Answer System wide call appearance SWCA Answer extension P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 32 Do Not Disturb DND on Busy When this setting is turned on you do not hear any ringing if a second call arrives while you are talking on the telephone If you want to know when a second call arrives turn this setting off For example Mr Forbes dislikes having his telephone ring when he is on a call Therefore he uses the DND on Busy feature so that additional calls are diverted to the Prime extension until he has finished his current call If your telephone is a Prime extension for any line do not use the DND on Busy feature If an extension is a member of a hunt group and the extension activates this feature the extension will not receive notification of incoming hunt group calls while on a call See Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy on page 101 Forward on Busy When you already have a call ensure that other calls to your extension are answered Forward the additional calls to an extension that you know will be monitored For example Miss Vale works with Mr Cassidy as a team They answer each other s calls Forward on Busy is set for the extension of the other person When Mr Cassidy is busy on a call other calls to his extension are forwarded immediately to Miss Vale If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Ca
37. Next or Press Heading F Next Auto Called ID F Next Log space P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 22 Introduction Speed dial enter Show Speed dial number is displayed F Show Use prime line COS pswds Next Display digits Show Show pwd nee N NS k Show lt name gt F Next Bypass restr n Call Log pswds Terminals amp Extns Show Show exin F Show Log pswd SysAdmin 727587 Next kShow Sys admin 23646 k Next Basic 22742 Progrming pswds Show Lines Next Desk pswd 4677 HOSP Next Hospitality Show HNext Cond None Services Sho
38. Next D Dial Next Priority call i Show Call Services k Next Hotline Next Perou F Next Aux ringer Fk Next Redirect ring Time amp Date Restrn filters F Next Receive tones F Next Line restrns I Next ATA settings ai Fk Next Remote restrns Show ATA ans timer F Next ATA mode System Prgrming Ringing groups F Next ATA tones Show Sched Night F Next ATA use Next Sched Evening F Next Intrusion ae Next Sched Lunch F Show Protect Ivi Fk Next Sched Sched 4 oftware keys Sane y Ringing service Show F Next Sched Sched 5 F Next Sched Sched 6 Next Nea Model Sched Night F Next Key prgrming Maintenance Hestm service s Snow L_ Next Sched Evening cae i Ai F Next Sched Lunch ext User speed dia F Next Call log optns gt Next TNA F Next Sched Sched 4 i x a7 og pe F Next Sched Sched 5 4 Next Dialling optns k Next Sched Sched 6 Next Language Usage Metrics Routing service Show F Next Display cntrst guise Fk Next Ring type These Next Fk Next Dest codes pee q Show Sched Night u next page Gommon settings k Next Sched Evening PEL filters Next Sched Lunch Show Show filter Show Next Sched Sched 4 D au rostms F Next Sched Sched 5 Extn Lock F Next Control extns F Next Sched Sched 6 pas nue F Next Schedule names Allow recall F Next Schedule times Allow redirect F Next Line extn rstrn Auto call info k Show Show line Note k Show Show line The k symbol means Press For example F Next 1stDisplay Press Show Press
39. OF QUIT OK Using Ring Again If you are checking a Speed Dial key enter the three digit Speed Dial code that you want to check Enter the feature code or press or UTT to quit programming or CLEAR to clear the numbers you have entered The system accepts the entry as soon as you enter a valid feature code Press and enter the feature code you want to assign to the key You cannot enter invalid codes You have programmed a key with a feature that was already programmed to another key The feature has moved to the key you just programmed Its original key is now blank Press the key you want to check Press or EXIT when you are finished Enter the number you want to programme and press To erase the key just press Enter the number you want to programme and press UE To erase the key press or OK If you cannot get through to someone on your Compact Plus system because their telephone is busy or there is no answer you can use the Ring Again feature to tell you when they hang up or next use their telephone You can also use the Ring Again feature to tell you when a busy line pool becomes available The Ring Again feature cannot be used with a hunt group 1 Dial the extension number you want to reach 2 Before you hang up press Cancelling Ring Again Press 2 Displays Can t ring again king Again YES HO EXIT You cannot use Ring Again on your current call You can only use Ring Ag
40. Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows TerminalsteExtns 4 Press Next until the display shows Software Keys 5 Press Show _ The display shows Sys ID 6 Press Next J The display shows Password keas 7 Press Show _ The display shows Kes 1 8 Enter the eight digit password number for Key 1 Use BESP to make corrections As soon as the eighth digit is entered the display shows Key Zi Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Software Keys 59 9 Enter the eight digit password number for Key 2 The display shows Kes 33 10 Enter the eight digit password number for Key 3 11 Press OE The display shows Entry successful 12 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 60 Software Keys Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Setting System speed dial e Setting System speed dial 62 e Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 62 e Selecting a line 63 e Setting the system to display a name instead of a number 63 e Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions 65 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 62 Setting System speed dial Setting System speed dial Speed dial saves time by allowing you to dial freq
41. Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press 48 to exit or to continue programming To use the auxiliary ringer with Night service you must programme under Services Activating Redirect ring As the administrator you may want to programme the system to remind people when a line is being redirected Redirect ring alerts your extension with a brief ring when a call is redirected on one of its lines See Line redirection on page 276 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 110 Programming capabilities 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Redirect ring Press CHAHGE to select Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue programming OS 9 How Line redirection is different from Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a tel
42. Programming paging 105 e Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension 106 e Allowing Priority call 107 e Assigning a Hotline 108 e Auxiliary ringer 109 e Activating Redirect ring 109 e Receive tones 110 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 98 Programming capabilities Programming an extension Many features that can be used at individual extensions see Appendix A Programming overviews on page 313 must first be programmed for use As the Administrator you can programme Full and Automatic Handsfree assign Pickup Groups to allow colleagues to easily answer calls ringing at a telephone other than their own assign page zones so that colleagues can page within their groups without disturbing the whole office programme an auxiliary ringer loud bell that alerts you when there are incoming calls to an extension assign a Direct Dial extension so your colleagues can reach an attendant by dialling just one digit set Call Forward so that all calls are answered when people s telephones are busy or unanswered programme Do Not Disturb on Busy activate Redirect Ring assign a Hotline extension to call one number automatically allow Priority call See Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 on page 322 in Appendix A for a programming overview Setting Call Forward no answer When you set the system up to forward calls th
43. Ringing service Press Next until the display shows Common settings Press Show _ The display shows Control extns Press Next _ The display shows Schedule names Press Show _ The display shows Sched 1 Press CHANGE and enter the name you want to assign to the schedule Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 170 Services Changing the time of a schedule It is only necessary to programme the start and stop times for schedules that are activated automatically If you are programming a schedule to start and stop at the same time each day use EOF to transfer the settings from one day to the next l 13 14 15 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi Press Terri Press Press Press Press Press Press Press Press start 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extns Next _ until the display shows Serwices Show _ The display shows Finding service Next _ until the display shows Common settings Show _ The display shows Control extns Next _ twice The display shows Schedule times Show _ The display shows Hondas Show _ The display shows Sched Might Show _ The display shows Start time Press CHANGE and enter the time you want the schedule to
44. T7208 telephones if you want to programme a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool Otherwise enter the telephone number exactly as you would if you were dialling it normally When you are finished press If you want to programme a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool Otherwise enter the telephone number you wish to programme exactly as you would if you were dialling it normally When you are finished press GE There is no line associated with the speed dial number you are trying to use Select a free exchange line or line pool and enter the speed dial feature code again The system cannot dial the number stored Re programme the number Enter a three digit number between 001 and 279 to select the code for dialling All lines are busy Press LATER then YES to have the system notify you when a line is free To make a call using a personal or System Speed Dial code 1 Press J 0 2 Enter the appropriate three digit Speed Dial code 001 279 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Answering calls e Answering a call 234 e Privacy feature external calls only 234 e Answering the next queued call 235 e Answering hunt group calls 235 e Multiple appearances of DIA lines 236 e Using SWCA line buttons 236 e Using Handsfree 239 e Ans
45. Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frgarming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Page tane 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 140 Programming feature settings Page timeout The Paging feature is automatically disconnected after a specified length of time See Paging on page 270 for information on using the Paging feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Page timeouts 9 Press CHAHGE to choose 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 2700 seconds 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Call log space Call log space customises how log space is allocated to telephones in the system Resetting all logs allo
46. The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next _ twice The display shows Services 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing grours 7 Press Show _ The display shows Rina grr 461 8 Press Next to cycle through the ring groups until you find the one you want from 001 to 100 Or enter the number directly on the keypad 9 Press Show _ The display shows Show extrit 10 Press to cycle through the extensions available or enter the number directly on the keypad The extension currently assigned to Ringing service will display Assigned 11 Press CHAHGE to assign another extension to ringing service 12 Press CC to exit or to continue in programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 160 Services Deleting extensions from ringing service To delete an extension from Ringing service follow the same steps as for adding The final CHAHGE step will Urassign the extension Restriction service Assigning restriction filters to schedules gives you control over calls made outside of normal business hours For example you may allow long distance calls during the day but bar them in the evening using the Night schedule and on weekends using Schedule 5 which you may have renamed Weekend schedule See Chart 18 Restriction ser
47. The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next J The display shows Key Frarmina 10 Press Show _ The display shows how many keys are on that model of telephone 11 Press FINE or press to see a list of key programming 12 Press TEL FEATR or CLF to change the programming for any key 13 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming User preferences 113 Changing a personal user speed dial code See Personal Speed Dial codes on page 231 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Carabilities 7 Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show The display shows Mode1 followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next twice The display shows User speed dial 10 Press Show The display shows the number of speed dial codes that are availab
48. access filter 89 e Locking an extension 93 e Preventing Last Number Redial 94 e Preventing Saved Number Redial 94 e Preventing Recaall 95 e Preventing Redirect 96 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 80 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Using restriction filters to bar calls Restrictions are digits that the system does not accept during dialling Overrides are digits that the system accepts in spite of the restrictions Groups of restrictions and overrides are programmed into restriction filters Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them repeatedly to each telephone and line a restriction filter allows you to apply restrictions as a single package of dialling sequences that are not permitted Different filters can be applied to e lines to prevent telephones that share a line from dialling restricted numbers e extensions to prevent a specific telephone from dialling restricted numbers e acombination of line and extension to allow specific telephones to be exempt from the line filter For example a manager and four employees share a line but the employees have a line extension filter that restricts the calls they can make on that line e ACIS5A private circuits to prevent people from using your network to make restricted calls The number of restriction filters that you have for your system depends on a numb
49. an extension a line pool access code to break out or a remote feature code from a DTMF telephone if a suitable remote access package has been assigned Number of appearances The installer programs the number of appearances for each DIA line assigned to the extension When an extension with an appearance of a DIA line answers a call other extensions with appearances of that DIA line do not track the state of that call The other extensions are free to receive additional calls on the DIA line while the first call is still in progress P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 252 Routing calls By default the number of DIA line appearances is one The secondary appearance of a DIA line is any appearance given to an extension after the first appearance There is a limit to the number of secondary target line appearances in the system Automatically the first DIA line 101 is assigned to the first Start extension number of 5001 DIA line 102 is assigned to the next extension number 5002 and so on Also the Received numbers as well as the Originating Line Identification number are automatically set to the extension number Received number When the system automatically answers an incoming call on auto answer ISDN BRA lines it matches these digits to a Received number and routes the call to the appropriate DIA line The installer programs the Received number length A Received number cannot be the sam
50. analogue equipment 152 Setting the delay before the ATA I ATA answers 152 Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I ATA 153 Setting whether the ATA I ATA should receive system tones 154 Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site 155 Services 157 Using alternate or scheduled services 158 Turning services on or off 158 Designating alternate routes for calls 161 Programming routes 163 Programming destination codes 164 Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code 167 Assigning control extensions 168 Changing the name of a schedule 169 Changing the time of a schedule 170 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide vi Passwords 171 Password security 172 Setting the SAPLUS password 172 Setting the Administrator password 173 Setting the Basic password 173 Hospitality passwords 174 I RAD password 175 Call services 177 Erasing a forgotten Call log password 178 Programming Call services 179 Ist Display 179 Auto called ID 180 Remote access 181 Programming lines and features for remote access 182 Auto Attendant 187 Auto Attendant 188 System Answer 188 Custom Call Routing CCR 189 CCR groups 189 Direct extension dialling 190 Customising System Answer and CCR 190 Turning System Answer on or off 191 Turning CCR onor off 191 Choosing the attendant telephone 191 Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a call 192 Setting the number of rings befo
51. any extension in that call Pickup group 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuard 3 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Fickur SrF 8 Press CHANGE to assign the telephone to Pickup group 1 2 3 4 or None 9 Press to exit or to continue programming Assigning a page zone Page zones give you the advantage of paging different parts of the office without disturbing the entire office You can assign extensions to one of three page zones A zone is any set of Norstar BST extensions that you want to group together for paging regardless of their location The options for this setting are zones 1 2 3 or None no page zone assigned The default is page zone 1 Members of a hunt group can be included in a page zone You can make an extension part of a page zone only if the extension has paging set to Y Yes Make sure that everyone who needs to make page announcements has a list showing the extensions that are in each page zone Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming capabilities 105 Se
52. bar Left side of of the volume bar Placing a call to a number in the Call Log You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call Log The number stored for each call may vary depending on the type of call For example if the call was placed from a Centrex or PBX system the first few numbers may need to be shortened before you can make the call If the number you want to call is long distance or if you want to use a line pool you may need to add numbers To place a call ges eS S Display the log item for the call you want to place Display the associated telephone number Dial any extra digits required Press an exchange line or line pool key Lift the handset This is not necessary if Handsfree is programmed at your telephone The displayed number is dialled P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 294 Using display features While viewing the log you can place a call to the number displayed in the log l 4 If the number begins with digits that you do not need when calling from your location press the left side of the volume bar or TRIM once for every digit that you want to remove Add any digits required to route this number to an appropriate line for example 9 to get an outside line if your system requires it Use the left side of the volume bar or BESF to erase incorrect digits You cannot enter host system signalling codes Select a line for t
53. busy the indicator for the line pool key turns on The indicator turns off when a line becomes available Making calls from an ISDN terminal Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do Norstar BST telephones To make an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal access an exchange line by entering a line pool code or a destination code Making a conference call Forming a You can share a call with two other people internal or external by forming a conference Once a conference is established any one of the parties can hang up leaving the other two connected unless the two other parties are on exchange lines In this case if the person who created the conference hangs up the other two parties may be disconnected or they may remain connected depending on the equipment in use Your system may be programmed to prevent connections between one exchange line and another To establish a conference call with two other Norstar BST telephones a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to it The keys appear starting at the lowest right hand position or one key above that if the Handsfree feature is assigned to the telephone The M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones do not have keys for intercom key assignment conference 1 Make or answer the call with the first party 2 Place that call on hold 3 Make the call to the second party 4 Press B 5 Take the held call off hold This is automatic
54. call is active on another telephone Outgoing calls When you make an outgoing call using the intercom key on your telephone the call is automatically transferred to the first available SWCA key Solid indicators appear beside the intercom button and the SWCA key on your telephone All other telephones in the group also see a solid indicator beside the SWCA key indicating that the line for that key is in use If you put the call on hold the SWCA key indicator fast flashes on your telephone and slow flashes on the other telephones in the group The call can then be picked up by any other telephone in the group No free call keys If all the SWCA keys are currently occupied when a new call comes in you can still put the call on Hold e IfaSWCA key has been freed up between the time you answered the call and when you put the call on Hold the call will transfer to the free SWCA key and act as described in Incoming calls on page 237 e Ifall SWCA keys are still occupied when you put the new call on Hold the call will be held at your telephone on the line it came inon Whena SWCA key becomes free you can take the call off hold and transfer it toa SWCA key so it has a group wide appearance then put the call on Hold again These principles also apply to outgoing calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Answering calls 239 Using Handsfree Norstar BST telephones allow you to make calls w
55. calls are handled at different times of the day Besides a Normal schedule there are six additional schedules Three of the schedules are already named Lunch Evening and Night You can assign new names for these modes and assign names to the three unnamed schedules When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to manual a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange lines that it controls into and out of service schedules A control extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions or both lines and extensions A service schedule activates three aspects of how the system operates Ringing Restriction and Routing e You can customise the Ringing service so that an extra extension rings for calls placed to the Direct Dial extension additional extensions ring for incoming calls an auxiliary ringer notifies when a line rings e You can bar long distance calls by applying Restriction service to a line or extension in a service schedule e You can take advantage of alternate route selection by assigning different routes to be used during the different schedules Turning services on or off Ringing service You can have Ringing service set up to run differently for each of the six schedules You may decide you want Ringing service for the Night schedule to come into effect only when it is turned on and off manually If you manually call on a service it remains in effect until
56. can have different restrictions As with extension restrictions you can apply a different line or extension restriction for normal service and for each of six schedules A maximum of 255 line extension restrictions may be applied to lines at telephones If a line extension restriction is assigned to a line at a particular telephone it overrides any line restrictions or extension restrictions that might otherwise apply If no line extension restrictions have been defined the numbers are checked against the extension restrictions and the line restrictions if either of these have been defined The numbers may be rejected by either restriction 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ek tns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 86 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show _ The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next until the display shows Line extn raster 10 Press Show _ The display shows Show linet 11 Enter
57. cannot be used as a line key such as an intercom key Handsfree Mute key or an Answer key Mowe line from Press the key of the line you want to move Press QUIT or QUIT when you have finished moving lines Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Customising your telephone 227 Mowe line tot Press the key you want to move the line to QUIT Neither of the keys is erased The lines or the line and feature simply switch places Fress a line The key you are trying to move is not a line key Ring type If you are trying to switch a line and a feature move the line to the Feature key and not the Feature key to the line To help you recognise which telephone is ringing in an open office you can choose one of four distinctive rings for your telephone 1 Press 6 2 Press 1 2 3 4 or HEST You hear the selected ring for 2 Ring volume seconds Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer then press or OK The display briefly shows Hew rina stored Press 0 to make the telephone ring Press the volume bar to adjust the volume up or down Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys The M7000 T7000 telephones have four programmable keys Features programmed on the keys have the following restrictions do not have a display for information or instructions do not have line or extension keys External autodial Press ra fi 1 2 Press the key you want to programme 3 4 Press
58. create for CCR tells a caller to press a number to reach a group of extensions You add or remove extensions from these groups CCR groups programming You can have a total of nine CCR groups Each group can include up to 20 extensions l O eS oY gy 11 12 13 14 15 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 BJ 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Auto Attendant Press Show _ The display shows Attd extn Press Next until the display shows CCR Press Show _ The display shows After Press Next _ until the display shows CCR 9rours Press Show _ The display shows Show Srour Enter the number of the group to which you want to make changes The display shows CCF 9rF 1 Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add or remove from the group Press CHANGE to select the status of the extension in the group Assigned or Unassgnd Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 194 Auto Attendant Using the pre recorded greetings Pre recorded greetings can be used whenever System Answer or CCR are turned on Pre recor
59. dial digits you do not need to perform step 3 or 4 5 Wait until the line indicators for the selected lines are lit then press or OK If you press or OK before all the lines light up those lines not lit are not redirected The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call To avoid redirection failing because the chosen line is in use choose a line pool with several lines in it The system does not check that the number you give for Line redirection is a valid one If you redirect to an invalid number redirection fails Using an Autodial key to enter the redirection number helps avoid this possibility An Autodial key used for Line redirection must be programmed to use a specific line P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 278 Forwarding calls Cancelling Line redirection 1 Press 6 4 2 Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected If a telephone has Redirect ring enabled it rings briefly for redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone set up the line redirection Displays while redirecting lines Intercom Line redirection QUIT ACC REMOWE Ho line to use Qutdoingd line Pool code _ QUIT Redir by 221 OVERRIDE Redirect denied Select line out QUIT Select linets 3 QUIT ALL Select linets 3 ALL OK Uneauirred line You selected the intercom key
60. greetings The maximum length of a single recording is 32 seconds If a user exceeds the maximum time for a single recording an error message and a tone will be given A greeting that is turned off is not erased The time used by the greeting will not be returned to the 96 second time pool User recordings are stored on the feature card and the recordings will be erased if the card is replaced If the same card is removed and reinserted the greetings are preserved The user will have to re record all user greetings when they upgrade to the new feature card System greetings are permanent and can never be erased FLASH memory degrades slightly each time a message is recorded Typically messages can be erased and written thousands of times However care must be taken to plan out what messages are to be recorded and how often in order to reduce the number of re recordings made over a long period of time A warning will be given when the card has degraded significantly This warning indicates that a new card should be obtained The pre recorded system messages do not use any portion of the 96 seconds of total recording time They cannot be erased but they can be turned off or replaced with a user substitute For clear sound quality in your greetings use the handset for recording greetings not the handsfree microphone P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 196 Auto Attendant Recording customi
61. hold the other two people can speak to each other e put one person on hold while you continue to talk to the other person You can re connect to the conference by pressing either of the held line keys For M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones press Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making external calls 261 Separately holding two calls For all Norstar BST telephones except M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones you can put the two people in a conference call on hold independently so that they cannot talk to each other 1 Press the line key of one person The other person is automatically put on hold 2 Press The second person is put on hold You can re establish the conference 1 Take one call off hold 2 Press B 3 Take the other call off hold Putting a conference on hold You can put a conference on hold allowing the other two people to continue speaking to each other Press You can re connect to the conference by pressing either of the held line keys Splitting a conference You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold On M7208N T7208 M7310N T7316 T7316E or M7324N telephones Press the line key of the person you want to speak to The other person is automatically put on hold On a M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones 1 Press B The first party is on hold 2 Press if necessary to switch parties Re est
62. is always turned off for M1700N T7000 and M7000 T7000 telephones 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terninals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr Press twice Press until the display shows HF answerback Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Nn MOr 1 O ATTENTION The T7316E keystation defaults to the mode that was used for the last call For instance if you use a headset to receive a call the next call defaults to the headset P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 104 Programming capabilities Assigning a Pickup group The Call pickup feature allows you to pick up calls that are ringing at another extension in your Pickup group You can assign extensions into one of four Pickup groups Options for this setting are 1 to 4 and None The default is None Extensions can be put into and taken out of any Pickup group See Answering a telephone using Pickup Group on page 241 for information on using this feature A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a Pickup group can be picked up by
63. is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a Pickup Group a call ringing on an exchange line is answered first followed by calls on the Prime line and finally calls on internal lines Displays Already joined You are already connected to the telephone that made the call you are trying to pick up This can happen if you are ona call to a colleague your colleague dials the number of a telephone in your Pickup Group and you attempt to pick up that call Pickur denied There is no call that you can pick up or the call that was ringing has already been answered You have tried to pick up a call on someone else s private line Pickur Enter the extension number of the telephone that is ringing You may use an internal autodial key to do this If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed Pickup press Trunk Answer The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer a ringing call anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system The line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the telephone you are using Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines for which a Ringing service schedule is active and if Trunk Answer is enabled Answering a call using Trunk Answer Press 2 J 0 0 If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Ringing service the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call that has been ringing the longest P0607
64. is put on Hold At that time the system can be set to only associate the call to that SWCA key while the call is on hold or it can be set to associate the call to that SWCA key for the life of the call As well you can specify whether the call on Hold will display as on hold on other telephones in the group or only on the set where the call originated Calls on Hold on the originating set show solid indicators beside both the line key that the call came in on and the SWCA key On all other telephones in the group if SWCA Hold is active only the SWCA key has an indicator A solid indicator on telephones in the group means that the call is being answered SWCA indicators incoming call Answering telephone EE NHE 4 D D D D D D Other telephones in the group f I JOOOOOOTC JUU DIRIREIEIE ntercom Intercom JUUI Intercom Intercom P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 238 Answering calls If you put the call on Hold the line button it came in on is cleared and the indicator beside the SWCA key goes to fast flash On other telephones in the group the indicator flashes slowly If the call is then retrieved at another telephone the call shows an appearance on the Intercom key of that telephone and the indicator beside the SWCA key becomes solid On all other telephones in the group the SWCA key displays a solid indicator as well meaning that the
65. line on any Norstar BST telephone On M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones pick up the handset 2 Dial the Call Parking retrieval code 101 to 108 The retrieval code for M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones is 109 Direct Inward Access DIA allows BRA lines to use internal lines to route incoming calls from the public exchange the calls pass directly to a Norstar BST extension without operator intervention The internal lines 101 to 140 between the Norstar CCU and the extensions are called DIA lines BRA lines must have Answer Mode programmed to Auto for DIA Outgoing calls can also be made on auto answer BRA lines if they are assigned to a line pool or appear on an extension The Compact Plus system handles simultaneous calls on DIA lines The number of appearances of a DIA line on an extension depends on the Line assignment setting for that extension If the DIA line is programmed to Appr amp Ring or Appr only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there are DIA key appearances If the DIA line is programmed to Ring only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there are Intercom keys Direct Inward Access on Loop guarded or Earth Calling lines When an incoming call comes in on an auto answer loop guarded or Earth calling line that is not configured to answer with DISA the caller hears system dial tone They can then enter a DIA line public received number to dial direct to
66. pressing the line again Press ALL to cancel redirection for all your lines When you are finished press or E Continue to press the lines that are no longer to be redirected Press or OK when you are finished Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Saving time with features e Using System Speed Dial 280 e Using Autodial 280 e Using Redial 282 e Programming memory keys 283 e Using Ring Again 284 e Using Hotline 285 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 280 Saving time with features Using System Speed Dial Frequently dialled numbers can be programmed with System Speed Dial codes so that they can be accessed quickly with a three digit code After programming Speed Dial codes distribute a list of System Speed Dial codes for your office 1 Press J 0 2 Enter the appropriate three digit Speed Dial code 001 to 255 Note To programme Personal Speed Dial codes 256 to 279 at your extension see Personal Speed Dial codes on page 231 Using Autodial You can programme memory keys for one touch dialling of internal or external telephone numbers Keys used for lines answer or Handsfree Mute cannot be used as Autodial keys If the power to your Compact Plus system is off for more than three days Autodial numbers as well as some other system programming may be lost from the memory Aut
67. ringing See Answering a telephone using Pickup Group on page 241 Call Pickup Group If your telephone is part of a Pickup Group you can answer calls ringing on any telephone in the same group For example Mr Forbes and Ms Smith both belong to Pickup Group 3 When Mr Forbes is away from his telephone Ms Smith uses the Call Pickup Group feature on her own extension to answer Mr Forbes calls Press 6 See Answering a telephone using Pickup Group on page 241 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 36 Call Queuing When more than one call is ringing at your telephone you can ensure you answer the calls in the order they arrive For example Mr Cassidy notices that he has calls on Line 3 and on line 4 He does not know which call arrived first so he uses Call Queuing to answer Press J 0 1 J See Answering the next queued call on page 235 Do Not Disturb If you do not want to be interrupted by any telephone calls turn on the Do Not Disturb feature so that calls are immediately transferred to the Prime extension For example Mr Moore is having a performance review meeting with the president of the company Mr Moore turns on Do Not Disturb before the meeting so that all calls are routed to the attendant Press 6 J A hunt group extension can temporarily leave the hunt group by activating this feature See Do Not Disturb on page 230 Line redirect
68. send a message to a user whose message waiting list is full Your list full You have tried to send a message but your telephone s list of sent messages is full Cancel one of the messages you have sent if possible or wait until you have received a reply to one of those messages Erasing messages You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your message list On a telephone with a one line display Press On a telephone with a two line display Press ERASE The Direct Dial extension can receive up to four messages and it can send up to 30 messages If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at another extension using the Call Pickup feature the message remains on your extension until you cancel it or successfully contact the extension that sent the message P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 270 Making internal calls Paging Paging allows you to make announcements over the Compact Plus system using the telephone speakers or your loudspeaker system if one is available The administrator can assign extensions to one of three page zones Making a page announcement 1 Press J6 0 2 Choose a page type or EXTHS through the telephone speakers internal page or SFER through an external speaker external page or BOTH for both internal and external combined page 3 If necessary choose a zone 0 to 3 4 Speak clearly into the handset and make your a
69. telephones also have key pre labelled key caps When you are labelling or removing a key cap activate Key Inquiry C _ 0 J first so that you do not accidentally activate a feature Note On M7100N T7100 telephones Key Inquiry shows your extension number followed by the function assigned to your single memory key This is usually Last Number Redial To remove a key cap slip the fingernails of your index fingers under each end of the key cap and pull up until it pops off If you do not have a printed key cap to replace it you can write the name in the blank label space beside the key The T series telephones are labelled beside the buttons You can use Desktop Assistant to make changes and print a new label card Your system administrator can access this application from the system CD or download it from http www nortelnetworks com Customer Support Software Distribution under Product Selection choose Desktop Assistant Moving line keys You can move exchange lines to different keys on your telephone Use this feature to arrange your lines as you prefer 1 Press Al 2 Press the key you want to move the line from 3 Press the key you want to move the line to 4 Press or QUIT when you are finished moving lines Note You also use this feature code to move hunt group appearances Displays Exchanged The two keys you selected have exchanged position Invalid location You have tried to move a line to a key that
70. the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 Press Show The display shows Member extns Press Next until the display shows Mode 10 Press CHAHGE to set the mode Sequential Cyclic Broadcast 11 Press to exit or Next to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 125 Setting the hunt delay You can programme the number of ring cycles the system allows at a hunt group extension before moving to the next hunt group extension You can estimate the delay in seconds by multiplying the number of rings by six l 4 5 6 7 8 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Farming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 9rour Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 Press Show The display shows Member extns Press Next until the display shows Hunt delai 10 Press CHAHGE to select the setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 or 10 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Programming options if all hunt members are busy There are three routing options if all agents are busy BusyTone the caller gets a busy
71. to choose between Extni and Hone HET Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEST Press CHAHGE to select Hone Intrnl or Extrnl Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 325 Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn i Enter extension number SHOW Line access MEST Carabilities SHOW Fud no answer HEST 11 times Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No HEST ATA settings P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 326 Charts Chart 13 User preferences User Frefernces SHOW y Model Press to see the setting NEXT Press to see settings HEXT lser Se ed lis Press to see speed dial codes HEXT Call log oFt ns Press to see settings Press CHANGE to select from Ho one answered Unanswerd ba me Log all calls and Ho autologging HEAT Dialling ort ns Press to see settings Press CHANGE to select from Automatic dial Standard dial and Fre Dial HEXT Language Press CHAHGE to choose between English and Orratng Tr MEAT Display cntrst Press CHAHGE to select level MEST Ring ture i Press CHANGE to select ring type 1 4 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 327 Cha
72. tone Overflow the call routes to the hunt group overflow position Queue the call stays in the system for the period of time programmed in timeout Within this period of time the call presents to an agent if one becomes available When time out occurs the call routes to the hunt group overflow position Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press until the display shows System Fr9rmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Srours P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 126 Programming Hunt groups 6 Press Show _ The display shows Show 9rour 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 8 Press Show _ The display shows Member extn 9 Press until the display shows If bus 10 Press CHAHGE to set the mode BusyTone Overflow Queue 11 Press 6 to exit or Next _ to continue programming Programming the queue timeout This setting allows you to programme the number of seconds a call will remain in the hunt group queue before it is also routed to the overflow position 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS
73. two or more attendants to handle calls for a busy person Each telephone can handle calls for up to four other people using separate Answer keys for each person Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Answering calls 243 Listening in a group The Group Listen feature allows other people in your office to listen in on a call without the caller hearing any noise from the office by turning the telephone external microphone off 1 Press 0 2 You hear the caller s voice through your telephone s speaker 2 Speak to the caller through the telephone handset To cancel the Group Listen feature during your call press je Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up You can switch a Group Listen call to handsfree by pressing the key labelled Handsfree To switch back to Group Listen enter the Group Listen feature code again Note Keep the handset away from the speaker to prevent feedback Press 4 to prevent feedback when hanging up Disconnecting accidentally If you accidentally drop the handset into the telephone cradle while answering a call you can retrieve the call by picking up the handset The system calls on the handsfree feature which keeps the call active Malicious call identification MCID The MCID feature allows you to use 9 7 to have call information recorded on the central office system of the line source provider for an incoming call on a specific li
74. which require tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds 1 While on a call press 0 2 Use the keypad to produce the appropriate tones Each tone sounds for as long as you hold down the key Note Long tones can be used on any call except a conference call You can use internal lines of the Compact Plus system to activate a device connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA in another area of your office or to exchange lines to access devices outside the Compact Plus system Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Special dialling features 299 Programmed Release Recall Run Stop The Programmed Release feature performs the function of the key in a programmed dialling sequence When the system encounters a Programmed Release in a dialling sequence it stops dialling and hangs up the call The Programmed Release symbol FA takes up two of the 24 spaces in a programmed dialling sequence The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a Programmed Release in a programmed dialling sequence Press RJ while programming a dialling sequence If your Compact Plus system is connected to a PBX you can use a Recall signal to access special features Programme Recall to a memory key for one touch access The Recall signal can also be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an external Autodial key or in a speed dial code The Recall symbol 5 uses two of the 24 space
75. you cancel it regardless of any automatic modes scheduled Manual service also overrides any automatic mode that is active If you programme a service as Manual you must use the control extension to turn the service on using a feature code The default control extension for all lines and extensions is 221 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Services 159 See Chart 17 Ringing service on page 329 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next twice The display shows Services 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing 9rours 7 Press Next until the display shows Sched Hight 8 Press Show _ The display shows Service 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Manual Auto or Off 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Add extensions for Ringing service You can add lines within groups to ring for these services on different extensions For example you might want the ring to be heard at two locations for ease of access To add an extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG
76. your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities 7 Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next until the display shows Lanauage 10 Press CHAHGE to choose English or Opratng 11 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 116 Programming User preferences Changing the display contrast Display contrast allows you to lighten or darken the telephone display to suit the lighting conditions in your office See Display contrast on page 225 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Termninals amp hextrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display show nnninnn 6 Press Show _ The display sho
77. your system you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to another exchange line P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 254 Routing calls 1 Press 0 or press TRANSFER 2 Call the person you want to transfer the call to 3 If you want to talk to the person you are transferring the call to wait for them to answer before proceeding 4 When you are ready to complete the transfer press OK or hang up You do not have to wait for the person to answer You can cancel a transfer and re connect with the party you are attempting to transfer at any time before the transfer is complete 1 Press 0 or press CAHCL 2 Ifyou are not re connected press and then press the line key of the original call which is now on hold Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping You can send an external call to another extension even though all of its lines are busy by camping the call The Call Camping feature is useful for people who process many calls such as secretaries or receptionists 1 After answering an external call press 2 2 Dial the extension number that is the destination for the call Camped calls appear on a line key on the receiving telephone if one is available If there is no line key available you receive a message on the display and hear camp tones Each Norstar BST telephone can handle only one camped call at a time Displays 21 Came max You tried t
78. 0 Press Show _ The display shows DialQut 11 Press CHANGE 12 Enter the Dial Out digits up to 24 or press CAHCL to choose Ho number You can press to insert a 1 5 second pause in the dialling string if necessary Route 000 shows no DialOut Ho numbre by default and cannot be changed 13 Press OF P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 164 Services Use Pool 1 Begin with Dial ut step 10 of previous procedure 2 Press Next _ The display shows Use 3 Press CHANGE to Pool A Pool B or Pool C Route 000 uses Pool A by default and cannot be changed Programming destination codes Dest code When programming destination codes you can use wild cards as the last number in a destination code string By using wild cards you can reduce the number of destination codes programmed in the system maximizing the distribution of destination codes in the system The wild card character is added to the destination code by pressing the AH key as the last digit of the code This character represents any digit from 0 to 9 except for digits already programmed or used by other numbering plans Should there be a conflict with other digits already programmed or used with by numbering plans the digit will not be displayed The wild card character can only be used to group destination codes that use the same Route and digit absorb length Given the routes shown in the table below the next t
79. 0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Naming extensions and lines Naming extensions 68 Naming lines 69 Changing the time and date Changing the time and date 72 Changing the time 72 Changing the date 73 Changing the time and date using the Basic password 73 Changing the time by anhour 74 Automatic Time amp Date 74 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Programming Direct Dial 76 Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 76 Programming an external Direct Dial extension 77 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Using restriction filters to bar calls 80 Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns 83 Assigning filters to a line Line restrns 84 Assigning filters to a line extension Line extn restrns 85 Class of Service passwords 86 Assigning a remote access filter 89 Locking an extension 93 Preventing Last Number Redial 94 Preventing Saved Number Redial 94 Preventing Recall 95 Preventing Redirect 96 Programming capabilities Programming an extension 98 Setting Call Forward no answer 98 Setting Call Forward on Busy 100 Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy 101 Programming Handsfree 102 Programming Handsfree answerback 103 Assigning a Pickup group 104 Assigning a page zone 104 Programming paging 105 Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension 106 Allowing Priority call 107 Assigning a Hotline 108 Auxiliary ringer 109 Activating Redirect ring 109 Receive tones 110 Program
80. 0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 148 Moving and copying Copying system programming to a single extension Pressing the COPY softkey allows you to copy programming from one extension to another extension to a range of extensions or to all extensions in the system 1 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Termninals amp extrs Press and enter the extension number whose programming you want to copy Press COF The display shows Cors 54 STEM data Press CHAHGE to toggle between SYSTEM data to copy the programming of the system and SY5STEM USEF to copy the programming of the system and the programming of a particular extension Press Next The display shows Cors 5IHGLE Press Next The display shows Cory tas Enter the extension number of the extension that will be programmed The display shows nnn gt nnn briefly then returns to Cora toi Keep entering extension numbers if you have other single extensions that you wish to programme Press CAHCL when you are finished Copying system programming to a range of extensions l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6
81. 1 Charts 317 Chart 3 Naming lines Lines SHOW Show line SHOW i 7 lt lt i Enter line number Press CHANGE and enter new name Chart 4 Time and Date Time Date SHOW Hour MEST Minutes MEST Yeart i MEST Month i 4 m 4 H Dan Press CHANGE and enter hour 2 digits If between 00 and 12 select AM or FM Press CHANGE and enter minutes 00 59 Press CHANGE and enter year 2 digits Press CHANGE and enter month 01 12 Press CHAHGE and enter day 01 31 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 318 Charts Chart 5 Direct Dial System prarmina SHOW Hunt Srours i T MEST Featr settings HEAT Direct dial SHOW D Bial i Press CHANGE to select Intrnl Extrnl or Horne SHOW Intrnl If Intrnl or Extrnl press CHANGE and enter number i Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 319 Chart 6 Restriction filters Restrictions SHOW Festrn filters SHOW Show filteri Enter a restriction filter number 01 to 99 SHOW Festrn fltinn 7 SHOW Restren nni SHOW Ho restrictions 3 Rest ni l Enter digits to be restricted Press OK Press ALC to add more restrictions to this filter SHOW Press REMOWE to remove a restiction from this restriction Derg HEAT Ho overrides ADD Enter digits
82. 1 to 255 Press Show The display shows the number currently assigned to the code or Ho number Press CHAHGE eo A e oo 9 Enter the telephone number up to 24 digits and press OK Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Setting System speed dial 63 Selecting a line After assigning a telephone number to the speed dial code you must select an outgoing facility for the number to use Choose a Prime line an exchange line a line pool or the routing table When you programme a line pool as part of a speed dial number use the programme key labelled Intercom and the line pool access code or a programmed line pool key If you assign a specific line to a System speed dial number only extensions with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial number 1 Begin with the display showing the speed dial code you just changed in the previous procedure 2 Press Next _ The display shows Use Frime line 3 Press CHANGE to choose Use prime line Use routing tabl Use line or Pool code Stop pressing CHAHGE when you see the line you want to use for the speed dial 4 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Setting the system to display a name instead of a number You can choose to have the display show either the extension number or a name for a speed dial code For example you could programme a speed dial for a frequently used courier and have the display show Co
83. 10 Press Show The display shows Overflow tHGri 11 Press CHAHGE to change the overflow position 12 Enter the new overflow position 13 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Setting the name You can programme the hunt group name such as SERVICE or SALES The name can be up to seven characters in length 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rourz 6 Press Show _ The display shows Show 9raurt 7 Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 6 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 128 Programming Hunt groups 8 9 Press Show _ The display shows Member extns Press until the display shows Hame 10 Press CHAHGE 11 Using the keypad enter the name of the hunt group 12 Press to store the name 13 Press to exit or to continue programming Checking hunt group metrics This feature provides you with hunt group call information k TA a 10 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press
84. 114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 242 Answering calls Displays Line denied You have tried to pick up a call on someone else s private line Fickur denied The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing Service Note Trunk Answer does not pick up calls that are coming in on a private line Answer keys An Answer key allows a telephone to answer calls intended for another telephone For example an Answer key allows an assistant to answer incoming calls to a manager s telephone When installing your Compact Plus system you assign telephones to have Answer keys for other extensions You also set whether the incoming call for the monitored extension will ring at the Answer key or simply activate the key indicator or gt or A for T7316E telephones A Norstar BST telephone may have up to four Answer keys to monitor other extensions M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones and ISDN terminals cannot be assigned Answer keys to monitor other extensions but they can be monitored Each Answer key should be clearly labelled with the name or number of the extension it monitors You cannot make calls using Answer keys If more than one call is ringing at someone s telephone the first call appears on the attendant s Answer key Any subsequent calls appear on intercom keys if they are available More than one attendant may have an Answer key for a single telephone This allows
85. 160 Ringing service 158 Routing 160 schedule 158 Trunk Answer 241 turning off with a feature code 167 Show time 288 Software Keys 58 Speed Dial personal 113 231 system 62 using 231 Square template T7316E buttons 211 square template T7316 buttons 214 Static Time feature 288 Symbols keys 290 System Answer 188 customised greetings 194 pre recorded greetings 194 testing 197 turning on and off 191 System ID 58 system settings Direct dial extension 144 System Speed Dial assigning a number 62 bypassing restrictions 65 feature 280 setting up 62 system speed dial alpha tagging 63 system version number 201 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Index 341 T telephone moving 146 M7100N 217 M7208N 216 M7310N 215 M7324N 214 telephone keys 15 template button assignments 213 testing Custom Call Routing 197 System Answer 197 Time and Date changing 71 74 feature 288 Show 288 timing a call 288 Transfer Callback delay programming 136 transferring a call feature 253 ISDN 309 Troubleshooting 203 206 Trunk Answer using 241 T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults 213 T7316E call icons 212 CAP lines 41 CAP station 211 T7316E Business Series Terminal button defaults 210 V version number system software 201 VIOC See Visually Handicapped Operator Con sole Visually Impaired Operator Console 115 218 Voice Call answering 271 features 271 making 271 muting tones 271 preven
86. 2 13 Press Next The display shows Line assignment Press Show _ The display shows Shaw lines Enter the line number you want to program press SCAH to go the first line assigned to this group or press LIST to go to the first line in the system Press CHAHGE to programme the line as Unassigned or Assigned HGrir means the line is assigned to another hunt group Press 4 to exit or Next _ to continue programming Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group You can assign distinctive ring patterns to your Hunt Group so that calls can be rated in priority for the group These distinctive ring patterns have the same characteristics as for line and set distinctive ring patterns Refer to Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns on page 234 The Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern determines how a call will ring within the Hunt Group na um Press e J If the Hunt Group ring pattern priority is higher than the line ring pattern or the ring patterns on member telephones the call will ring at all telephones with the ring pattern specified for the Hunt Group If members of the group have ring patterns assigned to their telephones that are higher than the ring patterns of the incoming line or the Hunt Group then the Hunt Group will use the ring of the corresponding member telephones If the incoming call line has a higher ring pattern assigned than the Hunt Group the Hunt Group wil
87. 2 Ona telephone with a two line display press ADL This step is not necessary on a telephone with a single line display 3 Enter the extension number of the person you want to send the message to The person s display shows MSG Cancelling a message 1 Press The display shows Cancel fori 2 Enter the extension number of the person you sent the message to Viewing received messages You can receive up to four messages from different telephones On a telephone with a two line display 1 Press M5G The display shows nnn called where nnn represents the extension number of the caller 2 Press HEXT to move through your messages On a telephone with a single line display 1 Press 66 6 The display shows the first message you received 2 Press or f to move through your messages P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 268 Making internal calls Replying to a message You can call the person or your voice message centre who sent a message while you are viewing the message On a telephone with a one line display Press 0 On a telephone with a two line display Press CALL If you wish to call your voice message centre using a line other than the programmed line exit your message list and dial the voice message centre telephone number using normal dialling methods Viewing the messages you have sent On a telephone with a two line display you can view the messages yo
88. 2 e Chart 10 Extension capabilities 2 323 e Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 324 e Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 325 e Chart 13 User preferences 326 e Chart 14 Extension relocation 327 e Chart 15 Copying settings 327 e Chart 16 ATA settings 328 e Chart 17 Ringing service 329 e Chart 18 Restriction service 329 e Chart 19 Routing service 330 e Chart 20 Passwords 331 e Chart 21 Call Log passwords 332 e Chart 22 Call Services 333 e Chart 23 Auto Attendart 334 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 316 Charts Chart 1 System Speed Dial Sys sreed dial SHOW Enter a System Speed Dial number from 001 to SHOW The number is displayed Press NEXT Use prime line Press CHANGE to select outgoing facility Use prime line Use line enter line Fool code _ enter pool access code Use routing tabl Disrlay digits Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEXT Appears only if Display digits is set to H No Enter a name HEXT Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No Chart 2 Naming extensions Terminals Extns SHOW Enter extension number SHOW Line access a HET Capabilities HEST Hame Press CHAHGE and enter new name Press NEXT Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 0
89. 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Estns 4 Press Show _ The display show Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next J The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show _ The display shows Fud no answer 9 Press Next until the display shows ATA settings 10 Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri 11 Press Next until the display shows ATA tanes 12 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Settings for analogue equipment 155 Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site The external ATA can connect Compact Plus to analogue telephones modems or answering machines that are either on your premises or at another location When you want to connect extensions at some other location to your system specify off site The default is on site l Un 51 Ex 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display show Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme
90. 84221 Routing service settings Routes Route 002 DialOut 01628 78 Use Pool A Dest codes DstCode 4 Normal AbsorbLength O Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Services 163 Specifying the type of line to be used Each route allows you to programme the line pool and thus the type of line to be used as the outgoing facility to reach a destination For example if ISDN lines have been placed in Line Pool B specifying pool B as the line pool to use in a route for a particular destination code ensures that all calls being routed to that destination use ISDN lines You must ensure that extensions and ISDN terminals have access to the line pools that they need to make calls programmed under Line Access in Lines See Chart 19 Routing service on page 330 in Appendix A for a programming overview Programming routes Dial Out 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show _ The display shows Routes 8 Press Show _ The display shows Show routes 9 Enter a three digit route code or press 1
91. Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Setting System speed dial 65 8 Press Show _ The display shows Auto Call Services 9 Press Next The display shows 1stDisFlay 10 Press CHAHGE until you get to Name 11 Press OF Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions System speed dial numbers are generally subject to any restrictions that are programmed in the Compact Plus system but they can be programmed to bypass these restrictions The default setting is N No which means the number is subject to normal call restrictions l 9 SOS e Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs Press Press Next Show until the display shows Sys sreed dial The display shows SFeed dial Enter the System speed dial code 001 to 255 Press assign Press Show ed to the c The display shows the number currently ode or Ho number Next until the display shows Burass restrni Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press 4 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 66 Setting System speed dial Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Naming extensions and lines e Naming extensions 68 e
92. Fwd to None Forward delay 2 3 4 6 10 Fwd on busy Fwd to None DND on busy 221 N Handsfree None Auto Std HF answerback Y Pickup grp None 1 2 3 4 Page zone None 1 2 3 Paging Y D Dial None Extn1 Priority call N Hotline None Intrnl Extrnl if Extrnl Use prime line Use line Pool code Use routing tabl Aux ringer N Redirect ring Y Receive tones N ATA settings ATA ans timer 3 5 7 10 If DN is the I ATA Use ringback ATA mode Tone Pulse ATA tones N ATA use On site Off site Name 221 User prefernces Mdl M7208N M7310N M7324N M7100N M7000 T7316E KIM Key prgrming f M7000 T7000 1 key f M7100N T7100 1 key f M7208N T7208 8 keys also Norstar Doorphone f M7310N 10 24 keys T7316 16 8 keys f T7316E KIM 16 8 plus 24 keys on each KIM f M7324N 24 keys also BST Doorphone CAP KIM key prgrming KIM1 KIM 2 User speed dial Call log opt ns No one answered Unanswerd by me Log all calls No auto logging Dialling opt ns Automatic dial Predial Standard dial Language English Opratng Display cntrst 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring type 1 2 3 4 Restrictions extns Restrn filters 00 99 Show filter _ Restrn fit 00 No restrictions Restrn fit 01 Restrn 01 Deny 0 Override 001 0800 Restrn 02 Deny 1 Override 001 No overrides Restrn fit 05 Restrn 01 010 Deny 010 No overrides Restrn 02 1 Deny 1 No overrides Restrn 03 00 Deny
93. Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 333 Chart 22 Call Services Terminals Extns SHOW Show extnti Enter extension number i SHOW Line access HEXT Carabilities MEXT 4 times Call seruices i SHOW Auto call info i MEST istDisrlas Press CHANGE to choose between Humbr and Line i HEAT Auto Called ID Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No i HEAT Log space i P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 334 Charts Chart 23 Auto Attendant System Fr9rmina SHOW Hunt Srours 4 HEXT 3 times Auto Attendant SHOW Auto Attend i HEAT Attd Extn Press CHAHGE to enter new extension number i MEST Sustem ansuer Press to see the setting for After i HEXT Press CHANGE to select number of rings 2 to 12 CCR Press to see the setting for After CCR lines 7 3 MEST i CCR 9rours Press CHANGE to select number of rings 2 to 12 Press and enter group number Press to see extensions in group Press CHANGE to choose between Assigned and Unass and Compact Plus System Administration Guide A AbsorbLength 166 ACISA assigning a filter 89 Administration password erasing 173 setting up 173 Advice Line 38 Alarm extension 141 alpha tagging system speed dial 63 Analogue equipment settings 152 Analogue Terminal Adapter delay before answering 152 dial mode 153
94. HEXT to change the options Press or QE to select the display option Setting your Call Log password You can set a password for access to your Call Log to keep your log private From then on you must enter this password to view your Call Log 1 Press 6 The displays shows Hew Fassurdi 2 Enter your four digit password The display shows Fereat Mews 3 Re enter your four digit password The display shows Password changed which confirms that your password has been assigned To enter Call Log using your password l 2 Press to enter the Call Log If you have programmed a password the display shows Fassword Enter your four digit password If you forget your Call Log password it can be removed in programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 292 Using display features Changing your Call Log password 1 Press 6 The display shows Old Fassurd 2 Enter your old password The display shows Hew Fassurdi 3 Enter your new four digit password The display shows Fereat Hews 4 Re enter your password The display shows Password charged which confirms that your password has been changed Removing your Call Log password When you remove your Call Log password anyone can access your Call Log 1 Press The display shows Old Fassurd 2 Enter your old password The display shows Mew Fassurdi Press or GE The display shows Ho Pswd assigned which co
95. Issue O1 Routing calls 253 The following table outlines the call scenarios when a DIA line is busy that is there are no available appearances of the DIA line Busy Tone Ring back If Prime is Yes call goes to call goes to call goes to i i Prime Note DIA does not apply to ISDN lines that are programmed as manual answer lines Making a Priority call If the administrator has allowed Priority call for your extension you can make an internal voice call when the Norstar BST telephone you are calling is idle busy or has Do Not Disturb activated If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office you can interrupt them Use this feature for urgent calls only Press 6 E or press PRIORITY Wait for a connection then speak Note A person who receives a Priority call while they are on another call has 8 seconds to accept or reject the call If the person does not take the call the Priority call feature puts their active call on Exclusive Hold and connects your call If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to reach your call is forwarded If the telephone receiving the Priority call is in a conference call the other two parties are automatically put on hold when the Priority call is accepted If the extension is a hunt group the Priority call is rejected Transferring a call You can transfer a call to any internal or external number Depending on how the installer has programmed
96. Key Inquiry feature to locate it Using Redial You can save the number of any external call you dialled and call it again later You can also redial the last external number you dialled Saving a number to redial later While you are still on the call press 6 Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits Redialling a saved number Press 6 Z when you are not on a call If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial key you can use 0 Key Inquiry then press the Last Number Redial key followed by to check the last number before you dial it You can disallow this feature in programming Refer to Preventing Saved Number Redial on page 94 Last Number Redial Press 6 Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits If you have a programmed Last Number Redial key you can use O Key Inquiry then press the Last Number Redial key followed by to check the last number before you dial it This feature can be disallowed on individual keystations Refer to Preventing Last Number Redial on page 94 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Saving time with features 283 Programming memory keys You can programme a feature code to a memory key When this guide tells you to enter a feature code you can press the memory key as a shortcut In some cases pressing the key a second time cancels the feature Any memory key not programmed as an external or internal target li
97. Line l i227 MEXT ERASE MORE Line l Logit HET ERASE MORE Line bel HEXT ERASE MORE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS Hew calls begin Ho info to log Ho lod assigned Ho resume item Deleting log items This call was answered at another telephone 227 This call was logged manually This call was not answered There are one or more items in your Message Waiting list and there are one or more new items in your Call Log Press 6J to change the first line of the display to the current time and date You have viewed your last old log item and can now view your new log items No information is available for the call No log space has been assigned to the telephone The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping Repeat Call Update or log reallocation while you are looking at the Call Log Your log has a set number of items that it can hold When it becomes full new calls cannot be logged When your log is full Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log item and logs the new call To enable Autobumping Press 6 The display shows Autobume OH To disable Autobumping Press 6 The display shows Autaburme OFF Compact Plus System Administration Guide 296 Using display features Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Special dialling features e Special dialling features 298 e Inserting a pause 298 e Setting Long tones
98. Manual Auto and oft Chart 18 Restriction service Services SHOW Ringing service HEAT Restrn service SHOW Sched sight SHOW Service Press CHANGE to select from Manual Auto and Off P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 330 Charts Chart 19 Routing service Services SHOW Ringing service HEXT 2 times Routing service SHOW Routes HEAT Dest codes i HEXT Sched Hight Press CHANGE to select from Manual i Auta and Off Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 331 Chart 20 Passwords Passwords SHOW COS Pswds Appears only if using SAPLUS password Press and enter password Then press to enter new password NEXT Call 109 Fsuds MEST Progrming rswds SHOW SusCoord Appears only if using SAPLUS password Press CHAMGE to enter new password MEST Sys coord Press CHANGE to enter new password HEXT Basic Press CHAMGE to enter new password HEAD IMG Progrming rswds HEXT TRAD Paud Press CHANGE to enter new password P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 332 Charts Chart 21 Call Log passwords Passwords t SHOW COS Fsuds i MEST Call log Fsuds i SHOW Show ext Enter extension number SHOW Log Pswd Press CHANGE to reset password to Hore Compact Plus System Administration
99. Mr Forbes realises that it would be better for the client to speak to Ms Smith so he transfers the call to Ms Smith s extension When Ms Smith answers Mr Forbes explains the situation briefly and then hangs up The client remains on the line with Ms Smith Press 0 dial the number then hang up See Transferring a call on page 253 SWCA keys System wide call appearance keys allow anyone in the system to pick up a parked call by entering the feature code that was used to park the call which can be any one of these 16 codes eJ 6 2 O to E666 You can also assign a number of these codes to memory buttons with indicators to any group of telephones In which case calls can be parked on the memory buttons and are visible and can be retrieved at other extensions by pressing the corresponding button See Setting SWCA controls on page 143 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 38 Making suggestions Please submit your comments and suggestions to British Telecommunications Norstar Product Manager Weston House 246 High Holborn London WCIV 7DQ UK Advice Line If you have difficulty programming or using a system feature refer to the description of the feature and follow the appropriate procedures If you still have difficulty call the Advice Line at 0800 378822 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Terminals and Extensions
100. N T7100 telephones have two default intercom keys which cannot be changed These keys do not appear on the telephone Assigning an Answer key to an extension Calls for other Norstar BST telephones can appear and be answered at the extension being programmed The extension numbers of the other telephones are referred to as Answer extension numbers You can assign up to eight Answer extension numbers to the telephone being programmed 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line ass ignment 7 Press until the display shows Answer extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn 9 Enter the extension number 10 Press CHAHGE to change the setting for the Answer extension number Appr amp Ring Appr only or Unassigned 11 To assign additional Answer extension numbers press Heading Show then enter the next Answer extension number 12 Press SCAM to view the Answer extension numbers assigned to this extension 13 Press to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 I
101. NORs BTO Working together Norstar Compact Plus Release 5 System Administration Guide Published by Nortel Networks on behalf of British Telecommunications PLC All possible care has been taken in the preparation of this publication but British Telecommunications PLC assumes no liability for any inaccuracies that may occur British Telecommunication PLC reserves the right to make changes without notice both to this publication and to the product that it describes No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means without prior written permission of British Telecommunications PLC If you find any errors in this publication or would like to make suggestions for its improvement please write to British Telecommunications Norstar Product Manager Weston House 246 High Holborn London WC1V 7DQ British Telecom is a registered trademark of British Telecommunications PLC Registered Office 81 Newgate Street London EC1A 7AJ Registered in England Number 1800000 Meridian Companion and Norstar are trademarks of Nortel Networks Meridian Norstar Business Communication System is manufactured by Nortel Networks Touchtone is a trademark of British Telecom This document is for use with Compact Plus Release 4 Norstar UK P0986921 02 Printed in Canada 2002 Nortel Networks Contents SECTION I Sy
102. Naming lines 69 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 68 Naming extensions and lines Naming extensions You can personalise your office communications by assigning names to lines and extensions in the Norstar system The extension default name is the extension number for example Extn 221 The line default name is the line number for example Line 41 Names can be seven characters long Line and extension names can contain both letters and numbers but not and To avoid confusion do not assign the same name to two extensions two lines or to both an extension and a line in your system Use creative combinations of initials abbreviations or even nicknames to give each extension a unique name As the administrator you can programme the system so that when you enter an internal extension number the person s name appears on your telephone display At the same time the person you are calling sees your name on their display See Chart 2 Naming extensions on page 316 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The displ
103. Norstar features 1 Press and enter the desired feature code on the keypad OR Press the programmed memory key 2 Follow the display messages If you change your mind while entering a feature code press to cancel If you use the C key to end a feature you may drop an active call To display what has been programmed on a memory key enter 0 the Key Inquiry feature code and press the memory key Note that Norstar BST extensions can accept voice calls only Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar BST extension Feature To activate To cancel Autobumping Call Logs 8 6 66 Auto Attendant Custom Call Routing alB e CCR Greetings 8 8 6 System Answer B 6J O Background music BJ 6 6J Call Camp on 8 2 Call Duration Timer wia Call Forward All Calls a Call Log aJe Call Log options 8 4 Call Log password 8 6 Call Parking 7 4 Call Pickup Directed 716 Call Pickup Group 76 Call Queuing 8 ojl Class of Service password 6 6 Conference 8 E Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Feature quick reference 307
104. Press 6 to exit or Next _ to continue programming Receiver volume allows you to specify whether the volume level of a receiver or headset returns to the system default level when a call is ended or put on hold or whether it remains at the level set at the individual telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd musics 8 Press Next until the display shows Receiver volume 9 Press Show _ and use CHANGE to choose Use sys volume or Use extn volume 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming You can send an external call to another extension even though all its lines are busy using the Camp on feature It is useful for people who process many calls such as secretaries or receptionists Camp timeout specifies the number of seconds before an unanswered call returns to the telephone that camped the call See Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping on page 254 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming te
105. R will play e Decide how many times a call rings before System Answer and CCR answer Be sure it will not conflict with voice mail or other Auto Attendant applications you may be using If CCR lines ring at the attendant set CCR and System Answer can also conflict e Use a programming session and feature codes to create your custom System Answer and CCR e Test both System Answer and CCR to make sure they are working properly e Make sure you programme your system to use the Held Line Reminder tone This will provide another indication that System Answer has placed a call on hold Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Auto Attendant 191 Turning System Answer on or off System Answer can be turned on and off at any telephone in the system System Answer only handles calls that ring at the attendant extension 1 Press The display shows the current status of System Answer 2 Press CHANGE or 3 Press 2 8 6 J 4 6 ADMIN or any password including the Basic password 4 Press CHAHGE to choose On or Off 5 Press OK or to confirm the change Because System Answer answers calls and then puts them on hold the feature should be turned off when no one is at the telephone to retrieve the calls You can programme the feature code for turning System Answer and CCR on or off on a memory button with an indicator at the attendant telephone You know that the feature is turned on wh
106. Ringing service 158 Run Stop 299 Saved Number Redial 94 Services 158 Show time 288 Static Time 288 System Speed Dial 280 Time and Date 288 Transfer 253 Trunk Answer 241 Voice Call 271 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Index 338 Voice Call deny 271 Wait for dialtone 300 feature display messages 219 G greetings customised 194 pre recorded 194 Group Listen 243 H Handsfree answerback 103 muting 239 programming 102 using 239 Held line reminder 137 Hold automatic 246 exclusive 246 Hotline assigning a telephone 108 bypassing 108 285 cancelling 108 using 285 Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern 123 hunt group calls 235 Hunt groups adding and removing members 121 and videophones 120 assigning and unassigning lines 122 checking metrics 128 hunt delay 125 if line is busy 125 member order 122 method of distribution 124 overflow extension 127 queue timeout 126 Hybrid template T7316E buttons 211 hybrid template T7316 buttons 214 intercom keys programming 43 using for Autodial 280 interrupting a call See Priority Call I RAD password 175 ISDN terminals Call Forward All Calls 309 feature codes 309 features 302 line access 259 supported services 303 transfer call 309 using 259 K key assignments M7100N telephone 217 M7208N telephone 216 M73 10N telephone 216 Key Inquiry 225 keys Autodial 280 Call Log 293 display 18 keypad 15 18 labelling 226 moving 226 t
107. SO en LT EN P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 108 Programming capabilities Assigning a Hotline You can set up a Hotline telephone that automatically calls one number internal or external when you lift the handset or press the key labelled Handsfree For example you can have an external Hotline to a taxi company for your customers to use A hunt group extension number can be specified as a Hotline telephone Label the telephone telling people that it is a Hotline and what number it dials so that they do not use it mistakenly See Using Hotline on page 285 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Hotline 8 Press CHAMGE to select the type of call the Hotline makes None Intrnl or Extrnl Choosing Internal assigns an extension number Choosing External assigns an external number If you select an external number 9 Press Show _ The display shows Extrn1 Hone 10 Press CHAHGE 11 Enter the telephone number
108. Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Fark time outs 9 Press CHAHGE to choose 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 or 600 seconds 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 135 Park mode Park mode allows you to suspend a call The call can then be retrieved by entering a retrieval code at any Norstar BST extension in the system The Park mode retrieval code is a three digit number By default the first digit of that number is 1 with the possible retrieval codes ranging from 101 to 109 Note 109 is reserved for M7000 T7000 and M7100 T7100 telephones You can determine how the system will assign retrieval codes to all telephones except the M7000 T7000 and M7100 T7100 telephones by choosing one of the following modes Lowest Norstar assigns the lowest available retrieval code If there is only one parked call on the system the number is 101 If there are three calls they are assigned 101 102 and 103 Cycle Norstar assigns the next available retrieval code in the sequence 101 to 108 If the last parked call was assigned 106 then the next one is assigned 107 If the last retrieval code was 108 then the next code is 101 See Call Parking on page 250 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your p
109. Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display reads Passwords 5 Press Show _ The display reads COS rswds 6 Press Next until the display reads HosFitality 7 Press Show _ The display reads Desk Fsuwdi4677 8 Press Next The display reads Cond Fsud Hone 9 Press the CHAHGE display key Enter a one to six digit number Press OK The ability to do remote programming using the Internal Remote Access Device I RAD is protected by a password The default password is the eight digit System ID number However this password is not usable It must be initialised by British telecom BT with the Remote Access to Customer s Equipment RACE BT sets the password then grants the customer access once the customer registers their system After this you are able to change the password as required The password is represented on the display by asterisks and is never displayed directly The remote administration software used with the I RAD allows you to use a password up tol0 digits long A longer password does not work with the software Your I RAD password should always match the password used with your Remote Set Tools software P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 176 Passwords Changing the I RAD password l 7 8 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi
110. The display shows Restrn filters 9 Press Next The display shows Extn restrns 10 Press Show _ The display shows Filters 11 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal 12 Press CHAHGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned to the extension for each schedule 13 Press to quit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 84 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions The following table shows the default restrictions Default filters for extensions Schedule Resiriction filter Sched 1 Night Sched 2 Evening Sched 3 Lunch Sched oo Sheds CES Schede o This means for example that if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 11 they are automatically applied when the Night schedule is in use Assigning filters to a line Line restrns Line restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a line to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from any telephone with that line appearance You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six schedules See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 for more information about the schedules 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The displa
111. The display shows rnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next _ The display shows Carabilities Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answer Press Next until the display shows ATA settings Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri Press Next _ until the display shows ATA use Press CHAMGE to choose On site or Off site Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 156 Settings for analogue equipment Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Services e Using alternate or scheduled services 158 e Turning services on or off 158 e Designating alternate routes for calls 161 e Programming routes 163 e Programming destination codes 164 e Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code 167 e Assigning control extensione 168 e Changing the name of a schedule 169 e Changing the time of a schedule 170 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 158 Services Using alternate or scheduled services Your Compact Plus system is set up to handle calls during normal business hours However you may wish to handle incoming calls differently at lunch time in the evening at night or during holidays To accommodate changes Compact Plus provides services that let you customise the way
112. ablishing the conference Press B P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 262 Making external calls Removing yourself from a conference You can remove yourself from a conference and connect the other two callers through your Compact Plus system Press the Transfer feature code When you remove yourself from a conference using the Transfer feature and both callers are from outside your system one of the callers must have called you on a disconnect supervised line or the call is disconnected Sending Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call Either system telephone engaged in a three way conference call over a Network CLID or DS trunk can issue a hookswitch or DTMF dialing request without leaving the conference e To hear DTMF tones on both telephones during dial activate Long Tones FEATURE 808 e To conference in someone through the trunk use Link FEATURE 71 Displays 3 parties only You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call or to join two conferences together Release one call from the conference before adding another or keep the two conferences separate Conf on hold You have put a conference call on hold Conference buss You have tried to make a conference call but your system is already handling its maximum of four conference calls Lineggi 21 You are on a conference with the two lines TRANSFER or telephones shown You can drop out of the confe
113. add or remove restrictions e add or remove overrides Rules for adding and creating filters e You can have up to 100 restriction filters e There is a maximum of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100 programmable filters e Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions There is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction e You can use any restriction or override in more than one filter Each time it is used it counts as one entry For example if restriction 411 exists in filters 01 02 and 03 it uses up three of the 400 entries available e The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits The maximum length of an override is 16 digits e You can use and in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an override These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided by the public switched telephone network PSTN e The solid dot can represent any digit It is inserted by pressing AH P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 82 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions When you are finished programming restrictions for one extension you can copy those settings to other extensions by using COPY at the Restrictions k display For more information about copying extension programming see Restriction service on page 160 You cannot delete a filter but you can delete a re
114. ain while you have a busy signal on an internal call or line pool request or while an internal call is ringing Press VES to use Ring Again Press Hd if you prefer to send a message Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Saving time with features 285 Using Hotline Hotline A Hotline telephone calls a pre set internal or external telephone number when you pick up the handset of a Hotline telephone or press 75 Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that Hotline is active Bypassing a Hotline Press a line key use the Pre Dial or Automatic Dial feature or press the key labelled Intercom before you pick up the handset on a hotline telephone Refer to your Telephone Feature Card P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 286 Saving time with features Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Using display features e Time and Date 288 e Static Time 288 e Call Duration Timetr 288 e Call Information 289 e Call Log 290 e Autobumping 295 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 288 Using display features Time and Date The current time and date appear on the display of idle Compact Plus telephones Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter cannot display the time and date Checking the current time and date while on a call You ca
115. als amp Extns programming allows you to assign Answer extension numbers to a telephone The Answer extn setting in Featr settings programming allows you to determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone Your choices are basic Enhanced and Extended Basic permits the same call coverage allowed in Compact Plus Release 1 Enhanced permits the same call coverage as Compact Plus Release 1 as well as overflow call routing calls but will not permit blind transferred calls Extended permits all call types except priority calls voice calls and other Answer key calls to alert at the telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Back3rnd musics 8 Press Next until the display shows Ans extn 9 Press CHANGE to select the settings Basic Enhanced and Extended 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming feature settings 143 Setting SWCA controls System Wide Call Appearance SWCA can be assigned to up to 16 pr
116. am circuits can be provided using ISDN as required rather than duplicating costly permanent circuits e LAN to LAN bridging LAN bridge routers allow flexible interconnection between LANs using ISDN with charges only incurred when information is actually transmitted e Broadcasting Using ISDN and digital codecs broadcasters can convey music news and commentaries with absolute clarity e Video surveillance Dial up access using videocodecs provides advanced surveillance on demand Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 303 e Accessing information services The fast call set up and high bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for accessing information services such as Internet and databases ISDN supported services Compact Plus supports the following ISDN services e basic incoming calls e basic outgoing calls e Direct Inward Access e Calling Line Identification presentation e Multiple Subscriber Numbering e sub addressing e bearer capabilities e teleservices The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used from ISDN terminals connected to Compact Plus Note that Norstar BST extensions can accept voice calls only Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar BST extension Although an ISDN S loop can support up to eight devices the loop has a limit of two B channels An ISDN data or voice terminal uses one B channel for an incoming or outgoi
117. an copy line assignment line pool access Prime line designation number of intercom keys settings programmed under the heading Carabilities Personal settings you can copy the personal programming for dialling modes line key positions personal speed dial entries automatic delivery of call information for outgoing calls log settings programmed memory keys P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 150 Moving and copying Settings you cannot copy e extension number and name e log password e Direct Dial and Extra Dial extension designations e Service mode Control extension designation for a line e Service mode Ringing extension designation for a line e Prime extension designation for a line or private line appearances e personal programming for display contrast ring type and ring volume Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Settings for analogue equipment e Settings for analogue equipment 152 e Setting the delay before the ATA I ATA answers 152 e Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I ATA 153 e Setting whether the ATA I ATA should receive system tones 154 e Setting whether an ATA is used on site or off site 155 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 152 Settings for analogue equipment Settings for analogue equipment Analogue equipment includes answering and fax machines as we
118. an earlier selected Alarm time To set a new time for an Alarm time re enter a new Alarm time The new time overwrites any earlier set time Cancelling the Alarm time for any telephone cancels the Alarm time for all the telephones in the same room Cancelling the alarm e To cancel the Alarm time on a Business Series Terminals or Norstar BST telephones press The display reads Alarm aff e To cancel the Alarm time on an analogue telephone press Recall l 8j 7 6 Turning off the Alarm When a telephone rings at the selected time the occupant can release the Alarm ring as follows e Press any key except the key e Onan analogue telephone lift and replace the handset back into position Note If the user presses the key when the telephone rings the alarm is temporarily deactivated snooze After a number of minutes the telephone will alert again If the user is on a call when the alarm sounds they can press any key except to cancel the alarm and maintain their active call Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Hospitality Services 51 Hospitality Services admin alarm feature Only an Hospitality Services HS admin telephone can use the Hospitality Services admin alarm feature The HS admin alarm feature is room oriented only it does not control the alarms on common extensions The Hospitality Services admin feature can query the current or last alar
119. and feature and line button capacity by adding one or more Key Indicator Modules KIM Each KIM has 24 buttons with indicator displays T7316E with KIM P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 212 About your system telephones A KIM that is configured to support line and hunt group appearances is called an eKIM A T7316E supports a maximum of four eKIMs A KIM that is not configured in system programming does not support lines This type of module is called an OKIM A T7316E can support a maximum of nine OKIMs You need to add a system power supply SPS if you install five or more OKIMs on a T7316E The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct Dial telephone for the lines and telephones it serves The T7316E telephone displays a set of icons in place of flashing arrows when it is connected to a system with version 5 or newer software If you connect a T7316E telephone to a system that is running previous versions the standard line indicators display The KIM also displays these icons Note that the KIM is only supported by version 5 and later software Active call The line is active and or you are connected A to this telephone x Ringing A call is coming into this line A Hold The call on this line is on Hold at this telephone Call forward The call on this line has been forwarded te A Active button The feature assigned to this button is active Also used by Do No
120. as the facility to place the call on Enter a line pool code ora destination code Press or ALE to begin redirection Press or REMOWE to cancel a previous redirection You have one exchange line on your telephone but you need a second line to perform Line redirection Redirect your exchange line using a line pool as the outgoing line You are attempting to redirect a line and the line you have chosen is the outgoing line you have selected as a destination You cannot redirect a line to itself Select another line Enter a valid line pool access code You have attempted to redirect a line but someone else has already redirected that line Press or OVERRIDE to override the previous redirection and redirect the line as you wish You can only redirect calls on individual lines Select the line that will be used to redirect calls out of the system Press the lines to be redirected To undo a line selection press it again Press ALL to redirect all your lines Continue to press the lines to be redirected Press or Ok when you are finished The line you are attempting to redirect cannot be redirected because the hardware does not support redirection Displays while cancelling redirection Select lines QUIT ALL Select linets t ALL OF Press the lines that are no longer to be redirected The lines light up as you press them Once you cancel redirection for a line you cannot restore it by
121. as you would dial it Press OK 12 Press Next then CHANGE to choose Use prime line Use line Pool code or Use routing tabl 13 Press to exit or to continue programming Bypassing a Hotline Press a line key or use the Pre Dial or Automatic Dial feature before you pick up the handset or press the key marked Intercom on a Hotline telephone Refer to Telephone Feature Card Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 109 Auxiliary ringer An auxiliary ringer is a separate external telephone ringer or bell that must be connected by the installer The installer programs the auxiliary ringer to ring for calls on a particular line in programming An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed to ring for a line placed in a Service mode The extension default for auxiliary ringer is No See Chart 12 Extension capabilities 4 on page 325 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Exktns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows Aux ringer 8 9 Un
122. assword is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter Administrator programming without a password Setting the Basic password The Basic password is one to six digits long and allows you to access some programming settings using feature codes You cannot enter regular programming with this password The default is 2 2 7 4 which spells BASIC on the keypad 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next four times The display shows Fasswords 5 Press Show _ The display shows COS rsuds 6 Press Next until the display shows Frogrming Fsuds 7 Press Show _ The display shows SysAdmint P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 174 Passwords 8 9 Press until the display shows Basic Press CHAMGE and enter the new password 10 Press OE to accept the new password Erasing the Basic password If you leave the Basic password blank by entering no digits in step 9 the password is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter Basic programming without a password Hospitality passwords The Hospitality passwords are one to six digits long and allow you to access some or all of the Hospitality Services feature programming There are two
123. at are not answered at a particular telephone you must define the extension that the calls are sent to and the number of times that an incoming call rings before the call is forwarded You can choose 2 3 4 6 and 10 rings The default is 4 rings Note If the extension that you are forwarding calls to does not have a free intercom key or has Do Not Disturb or Do Not Disturb on busy activated the incoming call continues to visually alert at your telephone and the caller continues to hear ringback If this is not desirable you can programme a Call Forward on Busy or Call Forward no answer destination for the second extension For example extension 224 is programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension 235 which in turn is programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension 240 Unanswered calls coming in on an outside line are automatically transferred to the Prime extension for that line Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 99 If the extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward no answer feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue to ring until the hunt time has expired A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on busy extension l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The d
124. ature Ho button free Make calls first Ho free lines Ho line selected In use 221 Incoming only LA QUIT BESP OK Invalid number Line denied Restricted call You have tried to make receive or pick up a call when no line button was available Some features also require you to have a button free Releasing calls can free up line buttons The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your telephone This display also appears when information about a call has been cleared by a system reset All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use This display also appears when you have tried to dial an external number or use a feature that conflicts with the lines line pools or Prime line used by the telephone This must be corrected by your Customer Service representative or installer The telephone has been set up to dial an external number on a Prime line but the telephone does not have a prime line This must be corrected by your Customer Service representative or installer You have tried to programme redirection while someone else is programming redirection Only one person can programme line redirection at a time The line you are trying to use for redirecting calls is for incoming calls only Choose an outgoing line Continue entering digits Press the volume bar or EKSF to delete incorrect digits Press or ok when you are finished You have entered an inva
125. ay shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press until the display shows Hame Press CHAHGE Nn Oh Ee Sh ON Enter the characters of the name using the key pad by pressing gt after each letter or press to restore the default name 10 Press to store the name 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Naming extensions and lines 69 Naming lines Assigning names to lines can help you identify incoming calls For example if both the Sales line and the Service line ring at your extension your display shows which line the call is on Sales or Service when the line key is pressed or the handset is lifted If the Sales department is in a meeting and they forward their lines to your extension the telephone display shows Sales for any incoming calls on their lines See Chart 3 Naming lines on page 317 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminales amp Extns 4 Press Next _ The display shows Lines 5 Press Show _ The display shows Show linet 6 Enter the line number Press The display shows the current name 7 Press CHAHGE 8 Enter the characters o
126. bers in this range cannot be members of a hunt group 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Fr3rming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt 9rours 6 Press Show _ The display shows Show Srour 7 Enter the hunt group number 1 6 you want to programme 8 Press Show J The display shows Member extns 9 Press Show _ The display shows the members for that group 10 Press ALL to add a member or press REMOWE to remove a member from the group 11 To program the extension appearance press The display shows HFer Ring 12 Press CHAHGE to select AFFr only AFFrERing or Ring onla 13 Press 6 to exit or Next _ to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 122 Programming Hunt groups Moving members of a group Member order within a hunt group is important The member order determines how a call is routed through a hunt group l Ooo NO E 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp extris Press Next until
127. blems and if necessary will have full support from Nortel Networks Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Introduction 13 You must be the administrator If the installer has given this guide to you you re most likely the system administrator As an administrator your role is to e help your colleagues learn to use their Norstar and Business Series Terminal BST telephones e change Norstar programming to customise the system for your office or to keep up with changes in your office environment or personnel e call for help or service when necessary System Administration Guide contains all the information you need to become proficient at using and programming the Compact Plus system Here s what you need to start programming By following instructions on the telephone display and by pressing a few keys you can change the Compact Plus system to suit the specific needs of your office Before you begin programming make sure you have one of the following e 17316E telephone and the T7316 T7316E programming overlay Heading Show T731 6E f a D Back Next programming q D buttons q D Business 0 D Series 2 Terminal D i oeg e g Heading Show T7316 aL Back Next programming o 0 buttons D g Programming D o overlay OSS ATN P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Admi
128. ces Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Software Keys e Viewing the System ID 58 e Software Keys 58 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 58 Software Keys Viewing the System ID You can view the System ID during a programming session in Software Keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns 4 Press until the display shows Software Kess 5 Press The display shows Ss ID followed by the unique System ID number 6 Press to exit or to continue programming Software Keys Software Keys are password numbers provided by the installer They are required by the system if you want to enable the Auto Attendant You are given three keys passwords consisting of eight digits each These numbers are entered in the Compact Plus system through programming using the Prime extension and the Software Keys heading Once the Software Keys are entered the system makes the corresponding capability available Record the passwords in the Programming Record You need the numbers to restore an upgraded system after a cold start Entering the Software Keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2
129. contain the following sequence number in the Call Log e number of the caller e indication if the call was long distance e indication if the call was answered and identity of who answered it e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line that the call came in on Call Log can help you to e keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls e track patterns for your callers for example volume of calls and geographical location of calls e record caller information quickly and accurately Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Using display features 291 build a personal telephone directory from log items The long distance indicator as well as the caller s number may not be shown in the log depending on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the caller s local telephone company Setting which calls are logged at an extension You can set which types of incoming calls are logged at your extension The options are t Fe Ho autolo3gina Ho one answered only for autologging extensions default setting Unanswered by me only for autologging extensions but answered elsewhere in the system Log all calls including those you answer applies to all lines capable of providing Call Information even if your extension 1s not assigned as an autologging extension for that line Press a Press or
130. crophone is turned off To turn the microphone back on again and continue your handsfree call press the key labelled Handsfree Mute or Mute Note The indicator next to the key labelled for Mute is solid when you are in handsfree mode It flashes when you mute the microphone P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 240 Answering calls Changing a handset call to a handsfree call Press the key labelled Handsfree and hang up the handset Changing a Handsfree to a regular call Lift the handset Hints for using handsfree Wait for your caller to finish talking before you speak The microphone and speaker cannot be on at the same time Your caller s voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same time Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough to turn on your microphone and cut off your caller s speech To prevent a possible echo keep the area around your telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen your microphone Turning down the microphone volume press the volume bar while speaking also prevents echoes When you change the volume level both the microphone and speaker volume are adjusted to prevent feedback problems Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise such as an air conditioner is behind it This limits the amount of disruptive background noise being transmitted In open concept environments use the handset when handsfree communication is
131. d call is on is in use or that line does not appear at your telephone Release the line or release an internal line While you are on a call you hear a beep whenever there is a camped call waiting Press the flashing line key or intercom key that the call is camped on If your extension has no free lines finishing one of your active calls releases a line for the camped call P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 256 Routing calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making external calls e Using an exchange code 258 e Using line pools 258 e Making a conference call 259 e Using Class of Service password 263 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 258 Making external calls Using an exchange code You can access exchange lines to make external calls by using the intercom key and dialling the exchange code the default exchange code is 9 The exchange code is generally used to make external calls on the M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephone and on telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter Using line pools A line pool is a group of exchange lines that can be shared by many telephones You can use a line in a line pool to make an external call The Compact Plus can have three line pools and a telephone can be programmed to access any of them A line pool access code is a numb
132. d depending on the availability of outgoing resources You may choose to redirect all your exchange lines or only some of them The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision and the outgoing trunk must be answer supervised for Line Redirection to perform properly You cannot use the Line redirection feature code at M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones or a telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter You redirect lines at a telephone but once redirected the lines are redirected for the entire system You can only redirect lines for which there are line keys on the telephone you are using How Line redirection is different from Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a telephone outside the Compact Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Using Line redirection You redirect lines at a telephone but once redirected the lines are redirected for the entire system You can only redirect lines that appear at line keys on your telephone When redirecting DIA lines ensure the outgoing resource is a line pool with sufficient lines to support redirected traffic The number of appearances for a DIA line is not limited to the number of appearances on that extension As many DIA calls are redirected a
133. d the message Ho free lines appears on the display For a line that is one of several lines in a line pool there is no direct indication that the line is busy as long as other lines in the line pool are free The indicator next to the line pool key and the Ha free lines message appear only when all lines in a line pool are busy If one or more lines in a line pool become hung these busy indications appear with greater frequency than usual Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Troubleshooting 205 Note If you ensure that all lines assigned to line pools appear individually on at least one telephone in the system it is much easier to detect hung lines When lines become hung as a result of a call being directed into or through your system on a private circuit they become hung in pairs The hung line pair consists of one private circuit and one exchange line or private circuit If network lines become hung regularly this indicates a problem with your network configuration Clearing a hung line 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Check the line number of the hung line using 0 the Key Inquiry feature 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 4 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 5 Press Next until the display shows Maintenance 6 Press Show _ The display s
134. d with the Basic password see Using passwords on page 29 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 20 Introduction Understanding your system Exchange lines have been set up by your installer to be either public private or part of a line pool e A public line is assigned to more than one extension e A private line is assigned to only one extension and to the Prime extension for that line e A line can be assigned to one of three line pools Extensions are assigned access to line pools and they share the lines in the pool with other extensions having access to that pool The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as the Prime extension for each exchange line The Prime extension provides back up answering for all unanswered calls coming in on the exchange line Map of Administrator Plus programming The programming map on the following pages shows the headings sub headings and settings that you can view when you access the programming menus after pressing 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG and entering the Administrator Plus password 7 2 7 6 BJE Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Introduction 21 Programming map Administrator Plus Line assignment k Show Show line
135. dant by pressing a single digit a way to transfer out of CCR and talk to someone who can direct their call Callers can also dial an internal number to reach someone who is working after hours If CCR forwards a call and it goes unanswered because e the caller entered an invalid extension number no one is there to answer the call e the caller entered the extension number of the attendant telephone the call is redirected to ring at the Prime extension after the usual Callback delay Once a caller has dialled out of the CCR greeting they cannot make another selection CCR allows callers to reach groups of telephones by dialling a single digit selected from an audio menu Create the CCR groups under the System programming heading When a call is sent to a CCR group in which all the telephones have the same call forward programming the call goes to the telephone with the lowest internal number If the telephones in a CCR group have different call forward programming the call is handled by the telephone programming that takes effect first For example if a telephone in a group forwards after two rings it forwards the call from CCR before the telephones in the group that are programmed to forward after three rings A CCR call is also forwarded by Forward on Busy the Call Forward feature code and Callback programming Be sure to keep this in mind when programming the telephones in your CCR groups P0607114 Issue 01 Compac
136. de Making a conference call To establish a conference call with two other Norstar BST telephones a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to it 1 Make or answer a call with one extension 2 Put the call on hold 3 Press the remaining intercom key and dial the second extension 4 Press B 5 Press the held intercom key step 2 to connect Accessing a Direct Dial extension Direct Dial allows you to dial designated telephones in your Compact Plus system or private network with a single digit You can have one Direct Dial extension in your Compact Plus system A person whose extension is a Direct Dial extension is usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department To access the Direct Dial extension enter the Direct Dial digit the default Direct Dial number is 0 Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Making internal calls 267 Leaving messages You can leave a message on the display of another telephone in your Compact Plus system Messages appear on the Norstar BST telephone display informing the recipient to call the person who sent the message Messages can only be sent within the Compact Plus system The message sent reads MSG Analogue telephones attached to an ATA cannot receive messages but can send them Sending a message 1 Press Ce Jf J
137. de 118 Programming User preferences Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Hunt groups e Adding or removing members from a group 121 e Programming Hunt groupsProgramming Hunt groups 119 e Moving members of a group 122 e Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 122 e Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group 123 e Setting the distribution mode 124 e Setting the hunt delay 125 e Programming options if all hunt members are busy 125 e Programming the queue timeout 126 e Programming the overflow extension 127 e Setting the name 127 e Checking hunt group metrics 128 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 120 Programming Hunt groups Programming Hunt Groups Establish hunt groups in your system to allow incoming calls to reach a group of extensions The hunt groups feature allows you to call a group of extensions with a single directory number Hunt groups are used in situations where a group of people performing the same task are required to answer a number of related telephone queries Some typical uses of hunt groups are e a sales department answering questions on product prices availability etc e a support department answering questions concerning the operation of a product e an emergency department answering calls for help A compan
138. de P0607114 Issue 01 Introduction 19 Ending a programming session Possible display Press to end the session CHAHGE Endofsession After a few seconds the time and date reappear on the display The system proceeds with any changes you make to programming as soon as you move away from a setting either by using the navigation keys or lL You can see if the changes you have made to telephone programming have taken effect by pressing the UPDATE display key The display shows you how many telephones are still waiting to update Using passwords to access programming There are three passwords for Administration programming 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The System Administrator Plus password accesses all the settings for Administration programming plus several installer settings e 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The Administrator password accesses most of the settings for Administration programming e 2 2 7 4 2 BASIC The Basic password accesses a few settings that can be changed using feature codes The Basic password allows you to delegate some of the duties of being an administrator without allowing access to sensitive programming It should be given out with care and changed when necessary for example when someone leaves the company For information about changing passwords see Setting the Basic password on page 173 For more information about the settings that can be change
139. ded greetings can be turned off not erased and or replaced with user recorded substitutes If a pre recorded greeting is turned off all SA and CCR features that use that greeting will be affected When pre recorded greetings are used incoming callers at the attendant telephone hear the System Answer greetings Lines that are set up to be answered by CCR play one of these pre recorded greetings They are e All of our operators are busy e If you know the extension that you want and are using a touch tone telephone please dial it now e Or hold the line and your call will be answered as soon as possible e Thank you for calling Thank you for calling is heard when the caller does not respond to the CCR business closed greeting after it has been repeated just before the system disconnects the caller Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR Compact Plus permits users to make their own voice recordings for all the greetings used in System Answer and Custom Call Routing A combination of pre recorded greetings and user recorded greetings can also be used to tell callers how their call is being handled For customer greetings users can create their own version or turn the greeting off completely With system greetings users can select either the system version their own version or they can turn the greeting off The following table lists the seven available recordings A G and the features that use
140. display shows Call services 8 9 Un Press Show The display shows Auto call info Press Next until the display shows Auto called ID 10 Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Remote access e Programming lines and features for remote access 182 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 182 Remote access Programming lines and features for remote access Remote access packages Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of Compact Plus line pools the paging feature administration and monitoring of the system You create a remote access package by defining which of your system line pools it will be able to access and whether it can use Page line pools and remote administration You then assign the package to individual lines using Rem line access and to a particular Class of Service password Remote access packages defaults Parameter Square PBX Hybrid Package 00 Prohibits remote access to line pools Page remote monitoring and administration Cannot be changed Package 01 Line pool access Y for Pool A N for Pools B and C Remote Page No administration and monitoring Packages 02 15 Line pool access N for Pools A to C Remote Page No administration and monitoring You can use COPY and the keypad to copy
141. e Paging on page 270 for information on using this feature Note Youcan make an announcement to one person by placing Un 9 Fi a Voice call C _ 6 6 to that person s extension Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Ektns Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Page zone Press CHAHGE to assign page zone 1 2 3 or None Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Programming paging You can choose whether a telephone is able to use the Page feature l Un E Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Termninals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Paging Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 I
142. e Manual Auto Off Trunk answer Y ExtraDial 221 Line settings Show line _ Ring grp 0 0 to 20 Aux ringer Y Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Restrn service Sched Night Service Manual Auto Off Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Routing service Routes 000 200 Show route _ DialOut No numbr Max 24 digits Use Pool A Pool B Pool C Dest codes Show DstCode _ Normal 000 Absorblengih All Night None Evening None Lunch None Sched 4 None Sched 5 None Sched 6 None Sched Night Service Manual Auto Off Overflow N Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Common settings Control extns For lines Show line _ L001 221 For extns Show extn _ 221 221 Schedule names Sched 1 Night Sched 2 Evening Sched 3 Lunch Sched 4 Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 5 Sched 6 Sched 6 Schedule times Monday Sched Night Start time 23 00 Stop time 07 00 Sched Evening Sched Lunch Sched Sched 4 Sched Sched 5 Sched Sched 6 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Sys speed dial Speed dial Max 24 digits XXX No Number lt extrn extn gt if extrn extn entered Use prime line Use line Pool code Use routing tabl I Display digits Y if Display digits N Name Sys Spd Dial XXX lt name gt Bypass restr n N Passwords COS pswds Show pswd _ 00 99 COS pswd 00 Pswd
143. e COS pswds Maintenance User Prefernces Call Log pswds System version Restrictions Progrming pswds Clear lines Call Services Hospitality pswds Sys admin log Lines Time amp Date Remote montr Name System prgrming Usage Metrics Restrictions Hunt groups Services Featr settings Ringing service Direct dial Restrn service Auto Attendant Routing service Remote access Common settings Hospitality Programming using the Administrator password Terminals amp Extns Lines Passwords Capabilities Name Call Log pswds Name Services Progrming pswds User Prefernces Ringing service Time amp Date Restrictions Extn only Restrn service System prgrming Call Services Routing service Auto Attendant Sys speed dial P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 30 Entering programming using the SAPLUS password The staff person who is in charge of making changes to the Compact Plus system is called the system administrator The System Administrator Plus password allows the administrator to access all the settings for Administration programming plus a few installer settings that may have to be changed infrequently All procedures in this guide indicate whether you need to use the System Administrator Plus or the Administrator password The default System Administrator Plu
144. e Terminals and extensions 40 e Assigning a line to an extension line access 40 e Assigning line pool access 42 e Assigning a Prime line to an extension 42 e Assigning intercom keys to an extension 43 e Assigning an Answer key to an extension 44 e Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension 45 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide AO Programming Terminals and Extensions Terminals and extensions Terminals amp Extns allows you to assign settings to each telephone 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals E tns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innn nnn represents the three digit extension number Assigning a line to an extension line access Line access allows you to assign lines to individual extensions When you are finished programming line access settings for one extension you can copy those settings to other extensions by using COPY at the Line Access display For more information about copying extension programming see Copying programming for telephones on page 147 Line Assignment This setting allow
145. e a password or one user can have several passwords Users should memorise their COS passwords instead of writing them down You can use COPY and the keypad to copy the restriction filters and remote package from one COS password to another The COS passwords must be unique Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 87 Before you begin programming a COS password make sure you have defined the appropriate restriction filters in Restrictions under Lines Then check that you have created a suitable remote package in Remote access under System Fr9rming See Using Class of Service passwords on page 263 for information about using this feature Selecting a COS password 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press e 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows Passwords 5 Press Show The display shows COS Fauds 6 Press Show The displays shows Show Fasud 3 7 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 8 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password 9 Press CHAHGE 10 Enter a password maximum six digits 11 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Assigning user restrictions to the COS password A COS passw
146. e as another Received number or the Auto number It also cannot start with the same first digit as any line pool code Busy tone for a Direct Inward Access line You can program a DIA line to return busy tone or route a call to the Prime extension for the line if all extensions are busy When Jf busy is set to Busy Tone the caller receives a busy tone When Jf busy is set To Prime the call is routed to the Prime extension If all intercom keys on the Prime extension are busy the caller receives busy tone Busy tone with Do Not Disturb on Busy When Do Not Disturb on Busy DND is turned on for an extension internal and network callers hear a busy tone External callers are transferred to the Prime extension If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND on busy feature is set to Yes for one of these extensions the second caller hears ring back and the call is routed to the Prime extension for the line If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND on busy feature is set to No on all extensions with an appearance of the DIA line the caller hears busy tone When Zf busy is set to Busy Tone the call is routed to the Prime extension if the DIA line feature is set to Prime extension The f busy feature is a line feature and DND is an extension feature The Zf busy feature is activated when a call cannot ring at any extension in the system Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114
147. e display shows System Frgarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Held reminder 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press Next The display shows Remind delay 11 Press CHAHGE to choose 30 60 90 120 150 or 180 seconds 12 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming This tone may be heard by all parties as soon as a three way call is established using the Conference or Privacy feature You can turn Conference tones on and off for the whole system See Making a conference call on page 259 for information on using the Conference feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press Terri 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 9 Press 7 2 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Next Show Next Show Next nale eExtns until the display shows System Frarming The display shows Hunt Srours until the display shows Featr settings The display shows Back9rnd music until the display shows Confrence tonei Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01
148. e extension can receive Call Information automatically for an incoming call You programme which Norstar BST extension will automatically receive Call Information If Call Information is not delivered automatically to your extension and your company subscribes to the service you can view Call Information using the Call Information feature code ISDN terminals receive Call Information automatically if supported by the terminal Not all calls on ISDN lines necessarily provide Call Information because of the way the call is routed or because the information was lost or corrupted Call Information gives you information about your active call or the highest priority ringing call Call Information is more detailed than the Call Display information you can receive without subscribing to Call Information For external calls you can display the caller s telephone number line name or a combination of these items For an internal call it is possible to display the caller s name and their extension number It is also possible to display information for ringing answered or held calls Call Information displays even if the call has been transferred forwarded or re routed in some way Call Log displays the same information as Call Information along with the date and time of the call and the number of times the caller called Note You may continue to press line keys to get information on other calls If you press the same line key twice y
149. e the system automatically selects the line rather than the user having to select the line See Assigning a Prime line to an extension on page 42 Redirect ring When this feature is turned on the telephone gives an audible signal whenever a call has been redirected This reminds you that a line has been redirected using the Line redirection feature and serves as a cue to turn the feature off For example you have re directed line 1 to another extension in the network If Redirect ring is on you hear a short ring every time a call on line 1 is forwarded to the other telephone See Activating Redirect ring on page 109 Trunk answer This feature is active by default for all Service modes This means that during non business or non busy times any extension can answer calls ringing at any other extension It does not matter which lines appear on the extensions It only matters that the line itself has been placed in a Service mode using its Control extension For example during the lunch break between 11 30 a m and 1 00 p m lines 1 2 and 3 are put in Lunch mode Trunk answer is active so whenever any extension rings Mr Cassidy who acts as a temporary attendant can answer from his extension See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 Answer extension If your telephone has an Answer key for another extension you can answer calls that come in for that extension on your telephone For example Mr Ca
150. each telephone appears as a blank key on that telephone Extension number 238 does not appear because it is assigned to the I RAD Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 217 M7100N T7100 telephones These telephones have a single line display and a single memory key with no indicator M7100N AS TT lt A Because these telephones do not have any line keys some of the system features work slightly differently from the other telephones Where other telephones may require you to select a line key to answer a call on these telephones you simply pick up the handset Where other telephones require you to select a line key to take a call off hold on these telephones you simply press There is no handsfree or mute key on this set Throughout this book and supporting documents you will find special instructions for the M7100N and MT7100 telephones in some feature descriptions The one feature key on these sets default to Last Number Redial Key assignment all templates M7000 T7000 telephones M7000 T7000 telephones do not have a display or line keys To answer a call with these telephones lift the handset To place a call on hold you press the sdh key Press wd again to reconnect the held call These telephones do not have Handsfree Mute capability The M7000 T7000 telephones are commonly used with the Hospitality Ser
151. ed on e Do Not Disturb is turned on e Voice Call Deny is turned on e it is not a Norstar BST telephone Your call proceeds automatically as a regular ringing call The line is open for you to speak Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Forwarding calls e Forwarding all calls 274 e Line redirection 276 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 274 Forwarding calls Forwarding all calls You can temporarily forward your calls to another telephone in the Compact Plus system by using the Call Forward All Calls feature If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not have the same exchange lines as your telephone the forwarded calls appear on intercom keys If a call is forwarded it does not ring but the line indicator flashes on your telephone You can still answer the call by pressing the key next to the flashing indicator If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their calls to one another be aware that it is possible to set up loops where a call is forwarded from one telephone to another in a circle but it is not answered anywhere 1 Press Jf 2 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to forward your calls to The display shows Forward nrirt To cancel press or press CAHCEL Note You can also set the system to forward your calls to another telephone when your telephone is busy or is not answe
152. eiving a Priority call If you are on another call inform the person you are speaking to that the call is about to be put on hold Press the flashing line indicator of the Priority call or wait until the call connects automatically in 8 seconds The Priority call goes through when you hear the next beep Your active call is placed on Exclusive Hold It is reconnected automatically when the Priority call ends unless you transfer the Priority call in which case you must press the line button of your original call to reconnect Use DND C amp _ BJ 6J or press BLOCK to reject a Priority call You have no free line buttons on which to receive a call Release one of your current calls and try to answer the incoming call again You have received a Ring Again offer for a line pool Press the flashing internal line button or YES to use the line pool On M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones just lift the receiver Otherwise press HO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire You cannot programme a feature button while you are on a call You have tried to use a feature while you were on a call or had calls on hold Release the call or calls before using the feature The line is in use Make the call using normal methods or wait until the line is free Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 221 You may see the following displays when using a fe
153. elephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp hextrs Press Next _ until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS rswads Press Next _ The display shows Call log Faudi Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter an extension number Press Show _ The display shows Log Fswdinnnnn 10 Press ELF to erase the current Call log password 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Call services 179 Programming Call services See Chart 22 Call Services on page 333 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1st Display The Ist Display option allows you to choose what call information is first displayed on an extension Depending on the services you subscribe to Call Display information may contain Un the number of the caller the name of the line in your Compact Plus system that the call is on or the name ofthe caller if you have a system speed dial coded with that number and a name Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension numb
154. elephone 15 KIM call icons 212 CAP line assignment 41 CAP station 211 T7316E defaults 210 L language display 115 VIOC 115 Last Number Redail preventing 94 Line assigning filters 84 assignment 40 naming 69 line access ISDN terminals 310 Line Pool feature 258 Line pool access programming 42 Line redirection cancelling 278 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Index 339 feature 276 using 276 Line Ringing See Line assignment lines assigning to a hunt group 122 CAPN CAP lines 41 Listen on hold 247 listening in a group 243 locking an extension 93 log calls See Call Log log space allocation 140 Logit 292 long tones feature 298 M Maintenance overview 200 map programming 21 Memory keys erasing 283 feature code 283 programming 283 Messages erasing 269 feature display 219 replying 268 sending 267 viewing 267 moving telephones 146 music background 132 On hold 132 M7100N telephone 217 M7208N telephone 216 M7310N telephone 215 M7324N telephone 214 N Network callback 137 Night Service See Services Night service 158 Norstar feature codes 306 numbering plan 161 O Originating Line Identification 252 overlay programming 14 overriding Call Forward 274 P Page timeout 140 Page tone 139 Page zone setting up 104 Paging features 270 programming 105 remote 270 Park Mode programming 135 Park timeout programming 134 Parking a call 250 Pass
155. em Frgrming 5 Press Show The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Trnsfr ca 1bk 9 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press Next _ The display shows Trnsfr cal lbk 11 Press CHANGE to choose 3 4 5 6 or 12 rings 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 137 Network callback If you transfer a call to a private network destination and the call is not answered it comes back to you after a specified time Network callback defines the time in seconds before a call is returned to your extension Since the time required to transfer a call across the private network varies depending on the complexity of your private network you may need to experiment to achieve the correct setting Note Depending on how a private network call is routed it may not always be possible for the system to return a transferred call 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frgarming 5 Press Show The display shows Hu
156. embers programme Bob s extension as the first member in the group set the distribution mode to sequential so Bob receives incoming calls first and name this group SALES See Programming Hunt groups on page 119 Pickup group Assign extensions to one of nine Pickup groups for maximum call coverage This ensures that extensions in a group can answer calls for any other extension in that group For example Mr Forbes and Ms Smith both belong to Pickup group 3 When Mr Forbes is away from his extension Ms Smith presses on her own extension to answer Mr Forbes calls A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a hunt group can be picked up by any extension in that Call Pickup Group See Assigning a Pickup group on page 104 Prime extension The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as the Prime extension for each exchange line Your system installer can change the extension number in Lines programming The Prime extension can be programmed to receive unanswered calls through Delayed Ring Transfer Held Line Reminders and Do Not Disturb transfers In a busy office the receptionist or secretary extension may be designated as the Prime extension P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 34 Prime line for an extension A line can be assigned to a telephone as its primary line to use when making an outgoing call This feature saves the user time becaus
157. en the indicator is lit at the attendant set Turning CCR on or off 1 Press The display shows the current status of CCR 2 Press CHANGE or 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN or any password including the Basic password 4 Press change to choose Off Bus Open or Bus Closed 5 Press OK or to confirm the change Choosing the attendant telephone Programming allows you to choose a telephone to be the attendant telephone External calls that go unanswered at this telephone are handled by System Answer 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Estns P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 192 Auto Attendant Press until the display shows System Frarming Press twice The display shows Attd extn nnn the extension number of the current attendant telephone Press CHAHGE and enter the internal number of the extension you want to assign as the attendant telephone Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a Call If the system is busy answering calls the line rings until System Answer can retrieve the call l ge oe a Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone
158. ephone outside the Compact Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Receive tones Analogue equipment that is connected to the system with an Analogue Terminal Adapter external or internal responds only to tone dialling signals If you have analogue equipment connected to a telephone set Receive tones for that extension to Yes Otherwise leave Receive tones set to No 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Receive tones Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue programming Un oe 1 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming User preferences e Programming User preferences 112 e Changing the key programming for an extension 112 e Changing a personal user speed dial code 113 e Changing the Call log options 114 e Changing the dialling options 114 e Changing the display language 115 e Changing the display contrast 116 e Changing the Ring type
159. er of factors You may want to have different restrictions for different times of the day such as barring long distance calls after work hours You may want different restrictions for a telephone that clients may use Default filters You may not have to create or change a filter Some of the more popular filters that restrict long distance calls exist by default The following table shows the default restriction filters that the Compact Plus system provides Filter 01 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with 0 or 1 except when the number begins with 0 800 Filter 05 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with 010 1 and 00 Filter 06 prevents you from dialling numbers that begin with any digit Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 81 You may change the default filters before you apply them For instance you might add override 002 to Restriction 02 permitting calls to 1 800 Restriction filter defaults Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 No restrictions cannot be changed 01 01 0 001 0800 02 No restrictions 03 No restrictions 04 No restrictions 05 01 010 02 1 03 00 06 01 the dot represents any digit 07 99 No restrictions or overrides programmed Customising a call barring filter You can customise default filters for your needs before you apply them You can e create a new restriction filter e
160. er of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access T 8 9 Press Next until the display shows Call services Press Show The display shows Auto call info Press Next The display shows 1st Disr la 10 Press CHAHGE to choose Name Numb or Line On an incoming call the display may show Unknown number if the information is not available from your telephone company You may see Private number on the display if the caller blocks that information P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 180 Call services Auto called ID This setting applies to Norstar BST extensions only ISDN terminals can receive calling line identification automatically if supported by the terminal The Auto called ID identification momentarily shows the number of the called party on the display of a Norstar BST extension The default is No the Auto called ID is not displayed 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The displays shows ninni 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next J until the
161. er you dial to get a line pool The access code can be up to four digits long You can have several different line pools for your system each one giving you access to a different set of exchange lines It is one way of sharing lines across telephones in a system You programme the line pool access codes and give each telephone access to a line pool Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access codes for the line pools their telephones can use Using a line pool to make a call 1 Press 6 4 2 Enter a line pool access code If you have a free internal line you can make a call using a line pool without entering the feature code first 1 Select an internal line intercom 2 Dial the line pool access code If no lines are available in the line pool you can use Ring Again at the busy tone You are notified when a line in the line pool becomes available See Using Ring Again on page 284 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making external calls 259 Programming a memory key with a line pool feature code When you programme a key with the line pool feature code you must enter a line pool access code after the feature code The programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool not the line pool feature See Using line pools on page 258 for more information If you programme a key with an indicator to access a line pool when all the lines in a line pool are
162. erminal Adapter ATA cannot use Automatic dial e Predial Allows you to enter a telephone number check it then change it before actually making the call The call is not dialled until you select a line or line pool or pick up the handset You can predial external and extension numbers You must however select the correct type of line external or internal for the type of number you have entered If all the lines on your telephone are busy you cannot enter a telephone number If your telephone starts ringing while you are predialling a number you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not Disturb Ce This does not affect numbers you are entering Setting the dialling mode of your telephone 1 Press 2 Press or HEXT to choose Automatic dial Predial or Standard dial 3 Press or OK to select the displayed dial mode Note Standard dial does not support dialling without lifting the handset of M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones If you have either of these telephones use the Automatic dial or Predial modes for dialling without lifting the handset Note The dialling modes feature code cannot be programmed to a memory key Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Customising your telephone 225 Display contrast You can adjust the contrast on your telephone display to make it easier to read 1 Press Z The display shows Contrast lewel 4 2 Press a number on the keypad f
163. erminals Extns SHOW Show extn Enter extension number th SHOW Line access MEST J Carabilities SHOW Fwd no answer Press to see the setting MEST Press CHANGE to enter an extension number Forward delas If Fwd no answer is set to an extension HEAL IHG Fud no answer i HEST Press CHANGE to select 2 3 4 6 or 18 rings Fwd on buss Press to see the setting i MEST i Press CHANGE to enter an extension number Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Compact Plus System Administration Guide Charts 323 Chart 10 Extension capabilities 2 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn SHOW Line access i HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fug ho answer i HEXT 3 times Handsfree HEXT HF answerback HEXT Fickur 9rF tr MEST Page zone i HEAT Paging Enter extension number Press CHAHGE to select Hone Auta or Std Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Press CHAHGE to select Hone 1 2 3 or 4 Press CHANGE to select Hone 1 2 or 3 Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 324 Charts Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 Terminals Extns SHOW Show extends Enter extension number i SHOW Line access l lt HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fud ho answer HEXT 8 times Press CHANGE
164. es The display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Next until the display shows Progrming Fsuds Press Show The display shows SwsAdmint Press CHAMGE and enter the new password oe NaS Press OK to accept the new password Erasing the SAPLUS password If you leave the SAPLUS password blank by entering no digits in step 8 the password is erased If you erase the password anyone can enter programming without a password Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Passwords 173 Setting the Administrator password The Administrator password is one to six digits long and allows you to access programming The default password is 2 8 J 6 4 6 which spells ADMIN on the keypad 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next four times The display shows Passwords 5 Press Show _ The display shows COS Fswds 6 Press Next J The display shows Progrming Fswds F 7 Press Show _ until the display shows Sys admini 8 Press CHANGE and enter the new password 9 Press OK to accept the new password Erasing the Administrator password If you leave the Administrator password blank by entering no digits in step 8 the p
165. ess Press Show _ The display shows Remote access pkgs Press Show _ again The display shows Show Fkg Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 Press Show The display shows LinePaol accessi Press Show _ again The display shows Fool A Press CHANGE to choose N No or Y Yes Press 4 to exit or to move to the next line pool Remote page l Se Se y A 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp Extris Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours Press Next _ until the display shows Remote access Press Show _ The display shows Remote access pkgs Press Show _ again The display shows Show pkai Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 Press Show _ The display shows LinePaol accessi Press Next _ The display shows Remote rage Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes Press 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 184 Remote access Remote admin l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 BJT SAPLUS T
166. etween two lines one active one on hold These telephones cannot retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone Answered hunt group calls can be placed on hold at the answering extension To put a call on hold press To retrieve a held call press the flashing line key of the held call Automatic Hold If you are on a call and want to pickup another call at your telephone use Automatic Hold Press the line key of the caller you want to speak to Your current caller is put on hold automatically Exclusive Hold You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved only at your telephone Press R or CS The line appears busy on all other telephones and the call cannot be picked up by anyone else in the office Display On hold LINEHAM You have placed one or more lines on hold The name of the line that has been held the longest is displayed This feature works with external calls only Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Holding calls 247 Listening on hold If you have been put on hold Listen on Hold allows you to replace the handset and wait to hear when the other person speaks If Automatic Handsfree has been assigned to your telephone you can use the Handsfree Mute feature instead of Listen on Hold Without handsfree 1 2 3 Press Hang up the handset Press the line key of the call You may hear indications from the far end that you are
167. f the name using the keypad or press to restore the default name 9 Press to store the name 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 70 Naming extensions and lines Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Changing the time and date e Changing the time and date 72 e Changing the time 72 e Changing the date 73 e Changing the time and date using the Basic password 73 e Changing the time by an hour 74 e Automatic Time amp Date 74 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 72 Changing the time and date Changing the time and date The current time and date appear on the display of idle Norstar Business Series Terminal BST telephones Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter cannot display the time and date Whenever the mains is interrupted the time is lost on the clock and needs reprogramming Note You need only change the time and date at one Norstar BST telephone The clock is reset for the entire system The clock also controls the schedules used for services such as ringing and routing After a power failure the clock is behind by the length of time power was lost For example if the power is out for two minutes the clock is two minutes behind See Chart 4 Time and Date on page 317 in Appendix A for a programmin
168. for each type Adding or changing Personal Speed Dial 1 Press a 2 Enter a three digit code from 256 to 279 that you want to associate with a telephone number 3 To include a line selection for this number press the line or intercom key To select a line pool press a programmed line pool key or press the programme key labelled Intercom and enter a line pool access code On the M7100N and the T7100 telephone you can only select a line pool 4 Enter the number you want to programme 5 Press gt or OK P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 232 Using personal features Making a Speed Dial call Displays storing and dialling a Personal Speed Dial number LA CANCL BESP OK Enter digits QUIT OF Error code Ho number stored Program and HOLD Program and OF QUIT OK Select a line Unknown namber Speed dial Ho free lines LATER Continue entering the number you wish to programme You can change the number by pressing BESF or CIN When you are finished press or OK Enter the telephone number you wish to programme exactly as you would if you were dialling it normally When you are finished press or Ok This message appears only after you select a line or line pool Enter a three digit number between 256 and 279 to select the code for programming There is no number stored on the speed dial code you have dialled On the M7100N M7208N T7100 and
169. g overview Changing the time 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Termninals amp extrs Press Next _Juntil the display shows Time amp Date Press Show _ The display shows Hours Press CHAHGE or HET if you do not need to change the hour Enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the display shows AM Press CHAHGE to select FM 8 Press Next The display shows Minutes 9 Press CHANGE 10 Enter the minutes 00 to 59 11 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming aS Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Changing the time and date 73 Changing the date l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp Extns Press Next _ until the display shows Time amp Date Press Show _ The display shows Hour Press Next twice The display shows Years Press CHAHGE Enter the last two digits of the current year Press Next The display shows Morth Enter the month 01 to 12 Press Next J The display shows Dars Press CHAHGE Enter the day of the month 01 to 31 14
170. hanging the filters assigned to an existing COS password A o eS 10 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display shows Passwords Press Show _ The display shows COS rsuds Press Show _ The display shows Show Pswd Enter the password number of the COS password whose filter you want to change 00 to 99 Press Show _ The display shows Feud followed by the number you chose and the current password Press Next The display shows User flt and the current setting If you are changing the user filter press CHAHGE The display shows User fltri P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 92 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 11 12 13 14 15 Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter or leave blank to return to the default filter Press Next The display shows Line ltr and the current filter assigned If you are changing the line filter press CHAMGE The display shows Line fltri Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter or leave blank to return to the default filter Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Erasing an existing COS password When a Class of Service password
171. he call as you normally would for making a call of this type for example by pressing an appropriate line Intercom or Handsfree key or by lifting the handset The displayed number is dialled Note When you edit a number in the log to call that number the edits you make are not saved in the log Programming a telephone to log calls automatically Your installer or sales support officer can programme each telephone to log calls coming in on a line automatically Displays 1 Unkrown number The caller s number is unavailable 12 1234567898123 _ indicates a new item HEXT ERASE MORE 1231234567890123 3 indicates that the call was answered HEST ERASE MORE 1251234567890123 5 indicates a long distance call HEXT ERASE MORE 4971234567890123 indicates that the stored number has HEXT ERASE MORE been shortened to its final 11 digits Press the volume bar or MORE to display additional information about the call Callis bumred One or more log entries have been deleted by the Autobumping feature while you are looking at the Call Log Hold or release Hold or release your active call before entering Call Log In use SETHAME The exchange line is in use Jan 4 9 8 a 3x The repeat call counter shown along with NEXT ERASE MORE time and date indicates the number of calls you have received from the same caller Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Using display features 295 Autobumping
172. he display shows Terminals amp extris Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next _ until the display shows Remote access Press Show _ The display shows Remote access pkgs Press Show _ again The display shows Show Fkg Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 Press Show _ The display shows LinePaol accessi Press Next until the display shows Remote admin Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes Press to exit or to continue programming Remote monitor l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours Press Next until the display shows Remote access Press Show _ The display shows Remote access pkgs Press Show _ again The display shows Show Pka Enter the number of the package 00 to 15 Press Show _ The display shows LinePool accessi Press Next until the display shows Remote monitori Press CHAHGE to choose N No or Y Yes Press to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Remote access 185 Rem line access Remote line access lets y
173. he restriction filters on a line or telephone 1 Press 6 J 2 Enter your six digit COS password The COS passwords allows you to define individual passwords and determine the restriction filters and remote package associated with each If you use your Compact Plus system from outside the office you may have to enter a COS password to gain access to the system Displays Blank display Enter your password It is not shown on the display Invalid Password You have entered a password that is not programmed into your system P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 264 Making external calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making internal calls e Making an internal call 266 e Making a conference call 266 e Accessing a Direct Dial extension 266 e Leaving messages 267 e Paging 270 e Remote paging 270 e Voice call 271 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 266 Making internal calls Making an internal call When you want to make or receive internal or private network calls make calls to hunt group extensions or access exchange lines through line pools use the button labelled Intercom A telephone may be assigned up to eight intercom keys 1 Press an intercom key or on M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones lift the handset 2 Dial the extension number or a line pool access co
174. hen wait for dial tone from that system before dialling the rest of your number The Wait for Dial Tone symbol 85 uses two of the 24 spaces in an Autodial or Speed Dial sequence 1 Press 0 4 while programming a dialling sequence Displays Invalid code You have entered a code that can only be used in a programmed Autodial or Speed Dial sequence not on a call you dial directly Programmed Release and Run Stop are for use in programmed dialling sequences only Using pulse dialling for a call If your external telephone lines use pulse dialling you can temporarily switch to tone dialling by pressing after selecting the line Tone dialling allows your system telephone to communicate with devices and services that respond to tone signals such as automatic switchboards and fax or answering machines Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN e ISDN services 302 e Digital Network Adapter 304 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 302 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN services Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN provides a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data image text and voice information through the telephone system The Compact Plus system can support up to two Basic Rate Interface BRI cards each of which allows the connection of up to four BRI l
175. hone 2 Press 2 6 6B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9raurs 6 Press Next J until the display shows Direct dial 7 Press Show _ The display shows D DialitIntrnl 8 Press Show _ The display shows Intrnl 9 Press CHAHGE Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Assigning a Direct Dial extension 77 10 Enter the extension number 11 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Programming an external Direct Dial extension When you assign an external number as the Direct Dial extension you must also specify whether to use a Prime line exchange line line pool or routing table to place the call 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next J until the display shows Direct dial 7 Press Show _ The display shows D Diali Intrnl 8 Press CHAHGE to switch to Extrnl 9 Press Show _ The display shows Extrnl Note If the di
176. hows System version 7 Press Next The display shows Clear lines 8 Press Show _ The display shows the number of the first busy line in the system followed by the time in hours and minutes that the line has been busy If there are no hung lines the display shows Ha bus lines for a short time then Clear lines 9 If this is not the line you want to clear press until the line you want to clear is displayed 10 Press CLEAR to disconnect the line The display confirms that the line has been cleared 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Power failure If the power fails your Compact Plus system maintains its programming for a period of three days Telephones also keep their personal programming The clock always needs to be set to the correct time after a power failure P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 206 Troubleshooting Power fail telephone Each analogue line card installed in either the Compact Plus Central Control Unit CCU or a Line Module provides one power fail telephone connection at the Box Connection ATTENTION power fail lines not supported The following line cards do not support power fail telephone lines NTBB1202 LM with auto ranging power supply These versions of LMs do not support emergency telephones NTBB20AD 93 UK Class B LM NTBB20AE 93 Australia LM NTBB20FD 93 Eng Fr LM NTBB20FF 93 Cala LM NTBB20FG 93 International LM
177. ide A2 Programming Terminals and Extensions Assigning line pool access Line pools allow the system to share lines among a number of telephones reducing line costs and the number of button appearances on the telephones in the system This setting allows an extension to access one or more of the three line pools available A B or C When you change the setting to Yes for a line pool the extension being programmed can access any line in that line pool 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ektns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment 7 Press Next J The display shows LineFool access 8 Press Show 9 Press CHAHGE to select the setting N No or Y Yes 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Assigning a Prime line to an extension This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone When the telephone is being used to make an outgoing call the Prime line is the first line the system selects 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Pas
178. ime Programming the Alarm time feature To programme the Alarm time feature on a Norstar BST telephone 1 Press 6 The display shows Alrm 7 am OFF 2 Ifthe alarm time is correct press OH OFF The display shows Alrm 47 66am OH Press DOHE to exit or To enter a new alarm time press CHG The display shows Enter times 3 Enter a new four digit alarm time If the 24 hour clock format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 no confirmation is required The display shows Alarm OH HHimm If the 12 hour format is used the display shows hh imm AM or PM Press the AM or FM display key The display shows Alarm OM kiki imm P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 50 Programming Hospitality Services To programme the Alarm time feature on M7000 T7000 telephones or analogue telephone 1 Press 8 Z 6 on M7000 T7000 telephones or press Recall 8 7 6 on an analogue telephone A tone sounds 2 Enter a four digit alarm time If the 24 hour clock format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 a tone sounds If the 12 hour format is used press to select am or to select pm A tone sounds At the selected times telephones in the room ring to wake up or remind the occupant of the next event or meeting If Music on hold is programmed for the system the occupant will hear music when they answer a wake up call Changing or cancelling
179. imultaneously to the same number In the case of a DIA call the same DIA line can be used but the ISDN extension needs to have the number of appearances for that DIA line to 2 For example in the case of a Presence video terminal the first call establishes a 1B video connection and the second call establishes the 2B video connection Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Feature quick reference 311 ATA extension features The Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA connects a digital Norstar telephone port to a standard analogue voice device It is most commonly used to attach to a single line telephone or a data communication device such as a modem or facsimile machine Refer to the ATA Terminal Feature Card for complete information Feature To activate To cancel Alternate line Link Call Forward Link 4 Link BEDIZ Call parking Link 7 4 Call pick up Directed Link 7 6 Call pick up Group Link 7 6 Call Queuing Link 8 Jf Call Waiting Link 8 fo f Camp on Link 8 fe Conference call Link B Hold Call Exclusive Link 7 9 Hold Call Public Link 2 Last Number Redial Link 6 Line Pool selection Link 6 4 Page General Link 6 0 Intercom Link 6 i External Link 6 2 Intercom
180. in Sequential starts the call at the first extension in the hunt group Distribution is complete when the system finds the first free extension This distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous calls to the hunt group Distribution is order based In Sequential mode you can programme your top salesperson to be the first member of the group to receive incoming calls Cyclic distribution begins with the member following the last extension to receive a hunt group call Distribution is complete when the system finds the first free extension This distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous calls to the hunt group Distribution is order based Using Cyclic mode you ensure that your helpline personnel receive calls in an evenly distributed method Ifa call goes unanswered and the hunt group has available agents the system routes the call through the member list until someone answers the call or the queue time out occurs If a queue timeout occurs the system routes the call to the overflow position l Pr Os Oy Er Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows Sastem Farming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show 9rour Enter
181. in your Compact Plus system or private network with a single digit The Direct Dial digit is the digit you dial to reach an attendant in your office You can have one Direct Dial extension in your Norstar system A person whose telephone is a Direct Dial extension is usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department The Direct Dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can invoke services to activate the extra dial telephone You can forward calls to a Direct Dial telephone that is outside your Modular Plus system if the Direct Dial configuration is set to use a routing table or a prime line where the prime line is set to Intercom An example of this is one of your direct dial telephones is configured on another system that is part of a private network Even though the telephone is on the private network the system considers it an external telephone Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct Dial digit to reach a Direct Dial extension For information on which telephones can access the Direct Dial extension see Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension on page 106 See Chart 5 Direct Dial on page 318 in Appendix A for a programming overview See Accessing a Direct Dial extension on page 266 for information on using the Direct Dial feature Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telep
182. ings on page 328 in Appendix A for a programming overview The ATA answer timer controls this delay The default setting is a 7 second delay before the speech path is connected 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Settings for analogue equipment 153 4 Press Show _ The display show Show extn 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next J The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show _ The display shows Fud no answer 9 Press Next until the display shows ATA settings 10 Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri 11 Press CHAHGE to choose 3 5 7 or 10 seconds 12 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I ATA You must tell the system whether the device connected to the ATA sends out pulse or Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signals The default signal is tone l Un 2 54 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 e b 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi P
183. ion You can use the Line redirection feature to redirect the calls coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office You can redirect exchange lines to ACISA private circuits and you can redirect ACI5A private circuits to either exchange lines or private circuits and you can redirect one exchange line to another You may choose to redirect all your external lines or only some of them For example you generally receive personal calls on Line 1 and customer calls on Line 2 You can redirect Line 2 to a colleague when you are busy but still accept personal calls on line 1 Press then follow the prompts on your display See Line redirection on page 276 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 37 Ring Again You can have the Norstar system notify you when an extension is either not busy or has just been used This feature enables you to reach the person on that extension For example Miss Vale has an urgent request for Mr Moore When she dials his extension it is busy She uses the Ring Again feature to monitor the line As soon as Mr Moore hangs up Miss Vale s telephone rings to let her know that she can try her call again Dial the extension number press then hang up See Using Ring Again on page 284 Transfer If you are an attendant or if a call should be routed to someone else you can do it easily with Compact Plus For example a client calls Mr Forbes
184. is no longer needed you can erase it l SYN oS 9 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extris Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Show The display shows Show Pswd 1 Enter the password number of the COS password you want to erase 00 to 99 Press Show _ The display shows Feud followed by the number you chose and current password Press CLE Press Next Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 93 Locking an extension You can limit the number of features that can be used or programmed at a particular extension by determining a lock condition for the extension The options are None default not locked You can programme any system or extension setting Full fully locked You can programme only these settings display contrast ring type ring volume and volume control Partial partly locked You can programme most extension settings You cannot programme system settings personal speed dial codes dialling mode or memory keys and you cannot move line keys or enable Voice Call Deny Note Do not apply ex
185. isplay shows Ternminals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press three times The display shows Fwd to Hone Press CHAHGE and enter the extension number where you want the calls to be sent You can press CLF to change the destination back to None Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Changing the number of rings before a call is forwarded l Un 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 6 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Ektns Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rninn innr Press Show _ The display showsCarabilities Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answers Press Show _ The display shows Fwd tai Press Next The display shows Forward delasi Press CHANGE to choose the number of times the telephone rings before it is forwarded 2 3 4 6 or 10 rings Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 100 Programming capabilities Setting Call Forward on Busy When a call comes in and you are already engaged on the telephone or when y
186. ithout using the handset The M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones do not support handsfree operation T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute key The system assigns Handsfree to the bottom right memory key but the Mute feature is assigned to the Mute key T7316E telephones have both a Mute and a Handsfree key which are located under the dial pad T7316 and T7316E telephones also have a Headset key which allows the user to switch between using the headset and using the other features such as Handsfree without need to remove the headset Making calls without lifting the handset 1 If you do not have a Prime line assigned to your telephone press a line key 2 Press the key labelled Handsfree The telephone internal microphone and speaker are automatically turned on 3 Dial your call and speak at a normal level Answering calls without lifting the handset 1 Press the line key for the ringing call This step is not necessary if you have a Prime line assigned to your telephone 2 When your telephone rings press the key labelled Handsfree and speak normally Direct your voice toward the telephone The closer you are to the telephone the easier it is for the microphone to transmit your voice clearly to your listener Muting a handsfree call You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can speak privately while you are on a handsfree call Press the key labelled Handsfree Mute or Mute The mi
187. keys 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordg 3 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows TerminalsteExtns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows System Fr3rmina 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Grours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Back3rnd musics 8 Press Next until the display shows SWCA Crtr1 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 144 Programming feature settings 9 Press Show _ The display shows Auto Associate H 10 Press CHAHGE to choose the Y or N option 11 Press Next The display shows Invoke ba Hold H 12 Press CHAHGE to choose the Y or N option 13 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming CLID Match This setting determines the minimum number of digits that an external call must match to an existing system speed dial number in order for the system to offer a name display for the CLID prompt if the system speed dial number is set up to display the caller name Refer to the Module Plus System Administrator Guide for information about setting up System Speed Dials 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordgdi
188. l Routing service modifications Changes to routes should only be made during least busy call times or on an idle system Plan to programme routes when user activity is at a minimum Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code There are separate on and off codes for each of these services Ringing Routing and Restriction BIZIt Turn on Ringing service 8 7 Turn off Ringing service 8 7 2 Turn on Restriction service E 8 7 Turn off Restriction service 8 7 6 Turn on Routing service 8 7 Turn off Routing service To turn on a service From a Control extension enter the feature code to turn Ringing Restriction or Routing service on If activating Restriction or Routing service use the password 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Service Modes OH To turn off a service From a Control extension enter the feature code to turn Ringing Restriction or Routing service off The display shows Hormal followed by the name of the service Ringing Restr n or Routing P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 168 Services Assigning control extensions When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to Manual a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange lines that it controls into and out of service schedules A control extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions or both li
189. l number between 01 and 09 For example if the Call Parking prefix is 4 the first parked call is assigned Call Parking retrieval code 401 The Compact Plus system assigns Call Parking codes in sequence from the lowest to the highest until all the codes are used This round robin approach means that a greater variety of codes are used which makes it easier for a call to reach the right person when more than one incoming call is parked The highest call number the Call Parking prefix followed by 09 is used only by M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones or devices connected to the system using an Analogue Terminal Adapter You programme the Call Parking prefix and the time delay before parked calls are returned to the originating telephone External calls parked for longer than the programmed delay are returned to the Prime extension Answered hunt group calls are parked in the same manner as other calls Call Parking can be disabled by your system administrator Call Parking can be disabled by your System Administrator You must have Call Parking active to use the SWCA keys Parking a call 1 While on a call press The display shows the Call Parking retrieval code 2 Use 6 O the Page feature or press FAGE to announce the retrieval code displayed by your telephone Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Routing calls 251 Retrieving a parked call DIA calls 1 Select an internal
190. l music source has been connected to your Compact Plus system this feature allows you to play music over your telephone speaker Press 6 The music pauses while you are making or answering a call To cancel press 6 J Do Not Disturb Extensions that are members of a hunt group can temporarily leave a hunt group by activating this feature Hunt group calls arriving while an extension is in Do Not Disturb mode will be forwarded to the next member in the hunt group Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone using Do Not Disturb DND You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone by pressing 6 The display shows Da not disturb Only Priority calls ring at your telephone A line key will flash when you receive a call but your telephone does not ring Refusing to answer a call While you are on a call you can refuse to answer a second call including a Priority call Press while your telephone is ringing Cancelling Do Not Disturb Press 6 The display briefly shows Allow calls Your telephone now receives calls normally Using Do Not Disturb Once you turn Do Not Disturb on calls are forwarded to the Prime extension only if there is no other telephone on which the line appears If there is another telephone that shares the same line the call may be answered by that person Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone Voice calls are presented as normal intercom calls
191. l ring with the line ring pattern Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi Press 2 6 6 J 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display shows System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show _ until the display shows Member extns Press Next _ until the display shows Dstnet Fing HOHE Press CHAHGE to toggle to the ring pattern number you want to assign to the Hunt group line Press 48 to exit or Next _J to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 124 Programming Hunt groups Setting the distribution mode There are three distribution settings Broadcast tings each extension in the group simultaneously The system handles calls one at a time routing other calls according to the routing option selected in the If buss setting see Programming options if all hunt members are busy on page 125 When a call is answered the next call in the queue is presented to the hunt group In Broadcast mode a single incoming call will ring simultaneously at all the extensions in a group This way all receptionists in the group can share the load of answering large volumes of calls An example is a fund raising campaign where a group of operators wait to take each call as it comes
192. le 11 Press Next to see the first speed dial code 256 12 Press Next to search through all the speed dial codes to find the code you want to change 13 Press Show when you see the code you want to change 14 Press CHAHGE and enter the telephone number the same way you would dial it on the telephone 15 Press DE 16 Press and choose the line or enter a code for a line pool that the speed dial code should use 17 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 114 Programming User preferences Changing the Call log options See Call Log on page 290 for information about using this feature l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extri 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show The display shows Carabilities 7 Press Next until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show The display shows Mode1 followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next until the display shows Call 193 oFt ns 10 Press Show The display shows Ho one answered 11 Press CHANGE to choose No one answered Unanswerd by me Log all ca
193. lephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Estns 4 Press until the display shows Sastem Fr9rmina P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 134 Programming feature settings 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt grours 6 Press Next J until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Came time outs 9 Press CHANGE to choose 30 45 60 90 120 150 or 180 seconds 10 Press 4 to exit or to continue programming Park timeout The Call Parking feature allows you to place a call on hold and assign it a code so it can be retrieved from any telephone in the Compact Plus system Park timeout specifies the number of seconds before an unanswered call returns to the extension that parked the call See Call Parking on page 250 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press
194. lid line pool code or an invalid destination code You have selected a line that is private to another telephone The destination you have chosen for Line redirection is restricted P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 222 About your system telephones Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Customising your telephone e Dialling mode 224 e Display contrast 225 e Key Inquiry 225 e Moving line keys 226 e Ring type 227 e Ring volume 227 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 224 Customising your telephone Dialling mode Norstar BST telephones support three dialling modes All three methods let you dial a call without picking up the handset The special features of the Automatic dial and Predial settings are available only when you dial without picking up the handset e Standard dial You make a call by selecting a line and dialling the number If you have a prime line it is selected automatically when you lift the handset or press the key labelled as Handsfree e Automatic dial If you have a Prime line assigned to your telephone you can dial a number without selecting a line Your prime line is selected as soon as you start dialling a number Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has no prime line or if the prime line is in use Telephones connected to an Analogue T
195. ll Forward on Busy setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Setting Call Forward no answer on page 98 Forward No Answer When you are away from your telephone ensure that calls are answered by forwarding to an extension that you know will be monitored For example Miss Vale works with Mr Cassidy as a team They make sure that one of them is always in the office Forward No Answer is set for the team mate s extension When Miss Vale is away from her telephone calls are forwarded immediately to Mr Cassidy If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward No Answer setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Setting Call Forward no answer on page 98 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 33 Hunt groups Establish hunt groups in your system to allow external and internal callers to reach a group of extensions by calling a single directory number The hunt groups feature ensures calls are easily routed to the appropriate people You can programme the members for a group member position within a group how calls are distributed how long is spent looking for available agents and what happens if all agents are busy For example your company has five sales people available to field calls from clients Bob is your most experienced sales person and you would like him to receive incoming calls first You would set up a Hunt Group with these five extensions as m
196. ll Services Auto Called ID 180 Ist Display 179 Camp timeout programming 133 CAP KIM and T7316E call icons 212 KIM plus T7316E 211 line assignment 41 See Central Answering Position CCR customised greetings 196 CCR destinations 197 CCR group adding or removing extensions 193 Central Answering Position feature 215 line assignment 41 centrex template T7316 buttons 214 Class of Service password changing 91 263 changing dialling filter 91 erasing 92 feature 263 setting up 90 using 263 Conference Call feature 259 Conference tone 138 contrast adjustment 116 Control extensions definition 158 programming 168 copying programming 147 COS See Class of service password Custom Call Routing customising 190 greetings 189 testing 197 turning on and off 191 Cyclical 124 D defaults buttons T7316 Business Series Termi nal 213 buttons T7316E Business Series Termi nal 210 destination code 165 Dialling setting 224 dialling features long tones 298 pause 298 Programmed Release 299 Recall 299 Run Stop 299 Wait for dialtone 300 Dialling filters ACISA private circuit 80 ACISA private circuits 89 extensions 80 lines 80 overriding 86 dialling modes 224 dialling options 114 dialling restriction defaults 81 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Index 337 DID template T7316 buttons 214 Digital Network Adapter features 304 Direct dial extension 144 Direct Dial extension assig
197. ll as analogue telephones Analogue equipment is connected to the Compact Plus system through the Integrated Analogue Terminal Adapter I ATA or with an external Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA An external ATA responds only to incoming tone dialling signals The ATA and I ATA allow analogue telephones to access some Norstar features such as Call Forward Conference Transfer and Last Number Redial Telephones connected to the ATA or I ATA cannot display the time and date For information on using Norstar features from an external analogue telephone connected to an ATA refer to Analogue Terminal Adapter User Card You can adjust the following settings e change the number of rings the analogue equipment waits before answering a call e change the extension used for analogue equipment to receive tone dialling signals e set whether an external ATA is required and whether it is used on site or off site e change the Dial mode for outgoing data of an external ATA to either tone or pulse e set whether the ATA should receive confirmation and error tones only for analogue telephones Setting the delay before the ATA I ATA answers To accommodate the device connected to the ATA you may want to lengthen or shorten the delay before the device is able to receive tones For example a modem or fax machine requires only a short delay Refer to ATA Terminal Feature Card for information on using the ATA features See Chart 16 ATA sett
198. lls The cyclical distribution starts the call at the extension following the one which was last presented with a call So if extension 223 224 and 225 are members 01 02 and 03 respectively of a hunt group and the last call was answered by 224 member 02 the next incoming call will start with extension 225 member 03 This way you can ensure that all your personnel are receiving calls rather than one person receiving the majority of calls Multiple appearances of DIA lines DIA lines can be assigned to one or more telephones Calls on DIA lines alert at all telephones programmed with appearances of the DIA line Once the DIA call is answered the call is no longer tracked by any other telephone with the appearance of the DIA line leaving the other telephones free to receive subsequent incoming calls Using SWCA line buttons System Wide Call Appearance SWCA can be assigned to up to 16 program buttons on each telephone in a group This feature allows a group of users to see and answer incoming calls on any telephone in the group See Changing the key programming for an extension on page 112 for general information about setting or changing key programming for a telephone SWCA keys can be assigned to memory keys using feature codes 0 to See Setting SWCA controls on page 143 for information about determining how the system will assign calls to SWCA keys and how the Hold feature will perform for these keys
199. lls or No autologging 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Changing the dialling options See Dialling mode on page 224 for information about using this feature l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 B 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Termninals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extra Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show J Press until the display shows User Frefernces Press Show _ The display shows Mode1 followed by a five digit code Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming User preferences 115 9 Press until the display shows Dialling oFt ns 10 Press Show _ The display shows Automatic dial 11 Press CHANGE to choose Automatic dial Standard or Predial 12 Press to exit or to continue programming Changing the display language The Norstar system supports a Visually Impaired Operator Console VIOC which provides computer based speech synthesis for the programming interface To use this function the display language needs to be set to Operating See Visually Impaired Operator Console on page 218 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
200. lters Press Show The display shows Show filter 10 Enter the two digit code or press Next _ 11 Press Show Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 83 12 Use REMOWE ADD the keypad and OK to change the restrictions for the filter 13 Press then to see the overrides for the restriction 14 Use REMOVE ADD the keypad and OK to change the overrides for the restriction 15 Press lt to quit or to continue programming Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns Extension restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a telephone to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from that telephone You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six schedules See Using alternate or scheduled services on page 158 for more information about the schedules 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Ternminals amp extrs 4 Press Show __ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next until the display shows Restrictions 8 Press Show _
201. m keys to an extension Intercom keys can provide an extension with access to internal lines and line pools 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment 7 Press until the display shows Intercom kessi 8 Press CHANGE to select the setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 9 Press 4 to exit or to continue programming Each intercom key assigned during programming automatically appears on the extension The keys start with the lower right hand P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 44 Programming Terminals and Extensions key or one key above if the Handsfree Mute feature is assigned to the bottom right key on the extension An extension needs two intercom keys to establish a conference call with two other Norstar BST extensions Only one intercom key may be required if the key is only to be used to access line pools and to make and receive internal calls If an extension has several lines assigned only to ring and not appear the arrangement works better if there are two intercom keys M7100
202. m time set for a room overwrite previous Alarm time programming for a room on the system assign an Alarm time for any room on the system change an Alarm time for any room on the system cancel an Alarm pending for any room on the system To programme the Alarm time for a room with the Hospitality Services admin alarm feature l 2 Press on a two line display telephone If configured the display reads Password Enter the Desk admin password The display reads Al of rm Enter the room number Press WIEW The display shows Alrm 87 88am OFF If the alarm time is correct press the OH OFF display key to activate the alarm Enter a four digit alarm time If the 24 hour format is used hour 00 to 23 and minutes 00 to 59 no confirmation is required The display shows Alarm hhimm OH If the 12 hour format is used the display shows the four digit time plus AM or PM Press the AM or PM display key The display shows Alarm HHimm am or rm OM Press the key to exit programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 52 Programming Hospitality Services Room occupancy RO The Room occupancy RO feature allows front desk operators to assign dialling restrictions to room extensions This feature also works with the Room condition RC feature Dialling restrictions for room extensions defined in Restrictions under Terminals amp Extns and Call restrns underHos
203. mbers that can be dialled over AC15A private circuits and exchange lines You do this by assigning a remote access filter to the ACI5A private circuits or exchange lines See Chart 7 Remote Access Packages on page 320 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswoard 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frgrming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Remote access 7 Press Show twice The display shows Show Fka 8 Enter a package number 9 Press Show _ The display shows LinePaol access 10 Press Show _ The display shows Fool Ai 11 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 12 Press Heading _ 13 Press Next The display shows Remote rage 14 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 15 Press Next The display shows Remote admini 16 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 17 Press Next The display shows Remote monitori 18 Press Heading _ 19 Press Show The display shows Fem access pkgs 20 Press Next The display shows Rem line access 21 Press Show The display shows Show lines P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 90 Barring calls and pri
204. ming User preferences Programming User preferences 112 Changing the key programming for an extension 112 Changing a personal user speed dial code 113 Changing the Call log options 114 Changing the dialling options 114 Changing the display language 115 Changing the display contrast 116 Changing the Ring type 116 67 71 75 79 97 111 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Programming Hunt groups 119 Programming Hunt Groups 120 Adding or removing members from a group 121 Moving members of a group 122 Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 122 Assigning a distinctive ring pattern toa Hunt Group 123 Setting the distribution mode 124 Setting the hunt delay 125 Programming options if all hunt members are busy 125 Programming the queue timeout 126 Programming the overflow extension 127 Setting the name 127 Checking hunt group metrics 128 Programming feature settings 131 Background music 132 Onhold 132 Receiver volume 133 Camp timeout 133 Park timeout 134 Park mode 135 Transfer callback 136 Network callback 137 Held line reminder and delay 137 Conference tone 138 Directed call pickup 139 Page tone 139 Page timeout 140 Call log space 140 Alarm extension 141 Answer extension 142 Setting SWCA controls 143 CLID Match 144 Moving and copying 145 Extension relocation 146 Copying programming for telephones 147 Settings for analogue equipment 151 Settings for
205. mpact Plus System Administration Guide 198 Auto Attendant Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Maintenance e Beginning a Maintenance session 200 e Checking the system version of the software 201 e System Administration Log record 201 e Clearing a hung line 205 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 200 Maintenance Beginning a Maintenance session Maintenance overview A Maintenance session helps you diagnose problems that may occasionally arise within the Compact Plus system The Maintenance section of programming has four headings available for System Administrator programming System version Displays the version number of the System Processor software Clear lines Clears a hung line See Clearing a hung line on page 205 Sys admin log Displays a list of system initialisations programming sessions invalid password attempts and password changes Remote montr Allows a technical specialist from a remote location to monitor the Norstar system It is not a regular part of system installation or maintenance You can run a Maintenance session from any working T7316 T7316E M7310N or M7324N telephone Only one person at a time can access a Maintenance session Photocopy the System Administration Log found at the end of this chapter and use it to record maintenance information Follow these steps any time
206. n a voice call begins at your telephone you hear a beep every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on To stop the beeping pick up the handset or press the key marked Handsfree Mute or Mute Preventing voice calls to your telephone You can use Voice Call Deny to prevent your telephone from receiving voice calls Press Voice calls ring as do regular internal calls Your other calls proceed normally To cancel press B Answering a voice call without touching your telephone If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone you can respond to a voice call without touching the telephone Handsfree Answerback is not available to M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones When someone makes a voice call to you simply start talking Your telephone microphone picks up your voice Once you have answered a voice call you treat it as a normal call Displays Dial voice call Dial the extension number or press the internal autodial key of the person to whom you want to speak Microphone mated Your Handsfree microphone is muted Press the key labelled Handsfree Mute or Mute or pick up your handset to respond to the voice call P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 272 Making internal calls Ho voice call Voice call The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one of the following reasons e it is active or ringing with another call e Call Forward is turn
207. n briefly display the current time and date while you are on a call by pressing 0 Static Time When you have a message or a Call Log item on the telephone display the time and date are not shown The Static Time feature allows the time and date to be displayed at all times e Press 0 6 to turn Static Time on e Press 0 6 to turn Static Time off Call Duration Timer Use the Call Duration Timer feature to see how long you spent on your last call or how long you have been on your present call By pressing Z you can see how long e you spent on your last call e you have been on your present call Displays 21 82 47 The display shows the last call you made or the current call and the total elapsed time in minutes and seconds Line i 41 45 You parked your last call The display shows the length of time the call was parked You cannot see the length of time a call was parked unless the call is active at your telephone or has just been released by your telephone Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Using display features 289 Call Information Call Information is an optional supplementary service provided by the public telephone company If your business subscribes to this service you can view the name number or both of an external caller unless the caller has blocked the information Lines in your Compact Plus system may appear at more than one extension However only on
208. ne EUROISDN lines only Note This feature must be allowed in network programming to work Check with your system administrator Invoke the feature code without hanging up and within 30 seconds time varies on different networks after the caller hangs up The following information registers on the network e called party number e calling party number e local time and date of the invocation in the network serving the called user e service provider option calling party subaddress if provided by calling user P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 244 Answering calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Holding calls e Holding 246 e Listening on hold 247 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 246 Holding calls Holding When you put a call on hold the Compact Plus system maintains the connection to the caller but the call is no longer active at your telephone The indicator flashes on all telephones that have access to the line with the call on hold The call can be retrieved from any of these telephones If the call comes in on a DIA line the indicator flashes at the telephone that answered the call leaving other telephones with appearances of that DIA line free to take other incoming calls The call can be retrieved at the answering extension On M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones alternates b
209. ne intercom Answer key or Handsfree key is available for programming features You can erase a memory key however you cannot erase Answer Handsfree Intercom or line keys You cannot programme the following feature codes to a memory key e Long tones for signalling remote devices see Setting Long tones on page 298 e Any code beginning with except 0 Language Choice Contrast Adjustment and J EBO to SWCA keys When you programme a key with the line pool feature code you must enter a line pool access code after the feature code The programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool not the line pool feature Programming a memory key 1 Press J BJ 2 Press the key you want to programme with a feature This step is not necessary on the T7100 or M7100N telephones which have only one memory key 3 Enter the feature code you want to assign to the key Erasing a key 1 Press fi J 2 Press the feature key 3 Press or OK to erase the key Displays lt Feature name gt The name of the feature assigned to a key SHOW OK is displayed when you press the key SHOW appears when there is more information available Press or SHOW for additional information P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 284 Saving time with features Enter code F QUIT CLEAR Feature code QUIT Feature moved Press a key EXIT Program and HOLD Program and
210. nect another telephone to the extension socket of the telephone you are moving before connecting the moved telephone to a new extension socket If you connect a telephone of the same type to the vacated extension socket that telephone receives the programming of the original telephone If you connect a telephone of a different type to the vacated extension socket that telephone receives default programming and the original telephone programming is lost Note Turn Extension relocation to No after the telephone installation and programming are completed rather than before This provides you with more flexibility in testing equipment If Extension relocation is set to No while a telephone is moved that telephone extension number and data remain with the physical port on the Central Control Unit CCU the telephone does not receive the original programming when it is reconnected elsewhere Remember to record any programming changes in the Programming Record See Chart 14 Extension relocation on page 327 in Appendix A for a programming overview Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Moving and copying 147 Relocate to extension jacks that are configured for telephones When moving extensions from one jack to another ensure that all jacks support a Norstar BST telephone If a fax machine Analogue Terminal Adapter analogue telephone or modem was plugged into the jack do not
211. necting to a DNA in your office The DNA serves as a terminal adapter TA and provides reliable high speed end to end digital connectivity between a personal computer and a remote data server through the CCU and public network The DNA uses standard communication protocols such as Point to Point PPP and Multi link PPP MP in applications such as Internet access and remote LAN access A Norstar BST telephone can also be connected to a DNA to access Norstar voice services You can have a conversation at the same time that your computer is connected to the Internet or remote LAN with no loss of CCU features This sharing of voice and data communication is made possible by software in the CCU that provides dynamic bandwidth allocation across the two channels of the connection What this means is both channels are used for data traffic When you use the telephone that is connected to the DNA one channel of the connection is for the voice conversation while the data connection continues on the other channel When the voice call ends the extra bandwidth is once again available to the data traffic Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Feature quick reference e Compact Plus feature codes 306 e ISDN terminal features 309 e ATA extension features 311 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 306 Feature quick reference Compact Plus feature codes Using
212. nes and extensions You can also use a control extension to manually override an automatic schedule You may want different lines to be assigned to different control extensions For example if the Customer Service department is open during evening hours you could place the Customer Service lines under a separate control extension The Sales department which closes at the end of the afternoon could be placed under a different control extension that could call on a service schedule for those lines while leaving the Customer Service lines unaffected Assigning lines to a control extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Common settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Control extns 8 Press Show _ twice The display shows Show linei 9 Enter the line number The display shows the line number followed by the current control extension 10 Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to assign as the control extension for this line 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Ser
213. nfirms that your password has been deleted Logging an incoming call Logit If your calls are not automatically logged you can manually log Call Information when you are connected to an external call Storing information for your current call can be helpful in many situations For example you may want to e record a caller s name and number without using paper and pencil e record only calls that you choose as opposed to using Call Log automatically e quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up To log an external call manually Press B Note If you programme the Call Log feature code to a memory key with an indicator the indicator lights when there are new items in the log Viewing your Call Log New items are shown with the first character underlined Press Ce J ft 2 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Using display features 293 Use either the display keys or your keypad to navigate through the log Action On entering the log View log items you have viewed before View the last item you viewed View new items in the log When viewing an item View the next item in the log Erase the item you are viewing View more information on this item Trim digits from the beginning of the number you are viewing prior to dialling the number Go back to the previous item Display key Right side of the volume
214. ng Hospitality Services 53 Room condition RC The Room condition RC feature allows users to exchange information about the serviced state of a room Users are front desk attendants cleaning or maintenance personnel of an establishment The RC feature is not available from a common extension The Compact Plus system maintains a database of the state of each room This database is accessed from either the room extension or a Hospitality Services admin telephone You can set a Room Condition password to limit access to this features See Room condition password on page 175 Room extensions can e set the associated room state to Service done Srvc done e set the associated room state to Needs service Heads sruc e query the state of the associated room on a telephone with a display Hospitality Services admin telephones can e set any room state to Service done Srvc done e set any room state to Needs service Heeds sruic e query the state of any room The system changes the state of occupied rooms to Needs service on a daily basis at a set time as configured in the system Maintenance personnel programme the condition of the room to Service done when service in the room is complete The front desk attendant can query or programme the condition of a room with a Hospitality Services admin telephone The Compact Plus system automatically sets the status of a room to Heeds sruc when a Room occupancy status changes fr
215. ng Position CAPN CAP telephone with a CAPN module M7324 or KIM T7316E can provide extra line keys The M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones are exceptions They have no line keys and can be assigned any number of lines Ensure that the lines assigned to M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones are assigned to ring so that you can detect incoming calls on the lines Number of appearances This setting allows you to assign the number of appearances of a DIA line lines 101 to 140 allowed on an extension In order to programme the number of appearances the line assignment value must not be Unassigned The default setting is 1 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals eExtrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press three times The display shows Shaw lines 7 Press Next The display shows Lnnn and the line assignment 8 Press Show _ The display shows ArFrearances This prompt does not appear if the line is unassigned 9 Press CHANGE and enter a numeric value from 1 to 255 10 Press Ok 11 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Gu
216. ng call An ISDN video terminal uses two B channels for an incoming or outgoing call If both B channels are in use other devices on that loop cannot make or receive calls until a B channel is available or until both B channels are available in the case of a video terminal Thus the number of terminals installed on an S loop must take into account whether you require dedicated access for the terminals on that loop Services not available Compact Plus does not support the following ISDN services e Terminating Line Identification e Three Party Service e Incoming Outgoing Calls Barred Service e Night Busy e Fixed Destination e Administration Controlled Call Diversion e Reasons for Release e Separate Channel Numbering Note that Norstar BST extension features other than Transfer and Call Forward All Calls are not available to ISDN terminals In addition you cannot retrieve a parked call or reach a Direct P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 304 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Dial extension by using the Direct Dial digit from an ISDN terminal Digital Network Adapter The Digital Network Adapter DNA is an optional device for use with the Compact Plus CCU It provides an integrated desktop solution for voice data and Computer Telephony Integration CTI services You can also telecommute over a digital telephone line to access high speed network features from your home by con
217. ning a telephone 76 106 external extension 77 internal extension 76 programming 76 using 266 disconnecting accidentally 243 display common feature messages 219 contrast 116 225 keys 18 language 115 VIOC 115 distinctive ring pattern Hunt Group 123 DNA See Digital Network Adapter DND See Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb feature 230 Do Not Disturb on Busy cancelling 101 setting up 101 E exchange code 258 extension Alarm 141 Direct dial 144 locking off 93 locking on 93 naming 68 programming 98 relocation 146 restriction filters 83 F feature 218 Analogue Terminal Adapter feature codes 311 Autobumping 295 Autodial 280 Automatic hold 246 Background Music 230 Call Camping 254 Call Duration Timer 288 Call Forward All Calls 274 Call Forward All Calls ISDN 309 Call Forward No Answer 98 Call Forward on Busy 100 Call Information services 289 Call Park 250 Call Pickup directed 240 Call Pickup group 241 Call queuing 235 Class of Service passwords 263 Conference Call 259 Contrast adjustment 116 Dialling modes 224 Do Not Disturb 230 Exclusive hold 246 Group Listen 243 Hold 246 hunt groups 235 Key Inquiry 225 Last Number Redial 94 Line Pool 258 Line redirection 276 Logit 292 Long tones 298 Messages 267 Paging 270 Pause 298 Personal Speed Dial 231 Priority Call 253 Privacy 234 Programmed Release 299 Recall 299 Remote access packages 182 Ring Again 284 Ring type 227 Ring volume 227
218. nistration Guide 14 Introduction e an M7310N telephone and its programming overlay Heading JU Back Norstar Programming Overlay M7310N Show Next JU Placing the programming overlay Place the programming overlay on the appropriate memory keys as shown in the preceding illustrations Four memory keys have special functions during a programming session Once you exit programming the keys return to their normal functions The programming keys are active or inactive at different stages of programming When a key is active the indicator next to it is lit with a lt q or P This is what each programming key does Heading shows you the heading for the current level Back moves you back one item at the current level Show shows you the first setting within the level Next moves you one item forward at the current level Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Introduction 15 The diagram below visually shows you how the overlay buttons move through the menus Terminals Extrs EXT 221 Back Current display Heading EXT 222 Show Next Line Access EXT 223 Understanding the telephone keys Take a few minutes to study the telephones Notice thatthe T7316 and M7324 telephones do not have a Shift key or dual memory keys Locate the different items shown in the following illustrations T7316E P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus Sy
219. nnouncement 5 Press Paging shortcuts Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the page type you can enter the following shortcut codes e Internal EXTHS _ 6 fi and zone 1 to 3 e External GPER C J 6 2 no zones e Combined E0TH J 6 8 and zone 1 to 3 Remote paging To use features on a Compact Plus system remotely press followed by the feature code Even if you are calling from another Compact Plus system press instead of e Making a remote page announcement 1 Dial the number to access your Compact Plus system 2 Enter your Class of Service password 3 Press 6 0 4 Choose a page type or EXTHS through the telephone speakers internal page or SFER through an external speaker external page or BOTH for both internal and external combined page 5 If necessary choose a zone 0 to 3 Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement 7 Hang up Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making internal calls 271 Voice call Voice call allows you to make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of one other telephone in the Compact Plus system The person you call hears a tone before your voice call comes through Making a voice call 1 Press 6 6 2 Dial the extension for the person you want to speak to 3 Wait for the beep then speak Muting voice call tones Whe
220. not necessary or when you need privacy during a call Another option is to use a headset Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Compact Plus system using Directed Pickup or Group Pickup 1 Press J 7 6 2 Enter the extension number of the ringing telephone Directed Pickup cannot be used to answer private lines To use Directed Pickup the telephone must be ringing If for example the auxiliary ringer is ringing but the call is not ringing at a telephone the call cannot be answered using Directed Pickup It must be answered normally at a telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call or by using Trunk Answer You can also answer a call that is ringing when someone has transferred the call to a telephone and the call is ringing on an intercom key Directed Pickup can also retrieve calls that are ringing on an Answer extension number Although you may enter the extension number of the telephone you hear ringing it may be calls from another telephone you are answering Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Answering calls 241 Answering a telephone using Pickup Group Your Compact Plus system can be divided into four Pickup Groups If you are a member of a Pickup Group you can pick up a call that is ringing at any telephone in your Pickup Group Press 6 J Note Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call If there
221. nt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Hetuk callbk 9 Press CHAHGE to choose 15 30 45 60 or 90 seconds 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Held line reminder and delay A reminder tone and display message occur at a Norstar BST telephone when a call has been placed on hold for a certain period of time The display continues to show the name of the held line until the call is dealt with In the case of multiple calls on hold the display shows the name of the line that has been held the longest Once that call has been dealt with the display shows the number of the next longest held call You can switch Held line reminder on or off and set the time before the reminder takes effect The Held line reminder emits a double periodic tone This tone distinguishes the feature from the Call Waiting tone which uses a single periodic tone P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 138 Programming feature settings Conference tone See Holding on page 246 for information on this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until th
222. nter a new destination code maximum seven To enter a wild card character in the destination code press the AH display key 11 If there are codes defined press to select one 12 Use ADD FIHO and REMOWE to change the destination code Normal rte Select which route a call using the destination code will take during normal service and for each of the schedules The automatic schedule times are programmed under Services The default Normal route is 000 which has no Dial Out digits and uses Line Pool A Note Be sure you have pre programmed the route See Designating alternate routes for calls on page 161 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 166 Services 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show _ The display shows Routes 8 Press Next The display shows Dest codes 9 Press Show _ The display shows Show DstCade 10 If there are no codes defined use ADD the keypad and OK to enter a new destination code maximum seven To enter a wild card character in the destination code press
223. o _ DND Blank Save No Pick Up Blank Save No Pick Up Blank Save No Pick Up Blank Blank Vce Cal Blank Blank Vce Cal Blank Blank Vce Call Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Page Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom _ Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom Blank Blank Intercom _ Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 215 Central Answering Position CAPN The Central Answering Position telephone CAPN is a Norstar M7324N telephone connected to at least one CAPN module The CAPN module is an add on device that provides 48 extra memory or line keys You can connect one or two CAPN modules to an M7324N telephone The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct Dial telephone for the lines and telephones it serves M7324N telephone CAPN mod The CAPN module key mapping is the same for all templates All keys are blank keys by default M7310N telephone The M7310N telephone has a two line display three display keys 10 memory keys with indicators 12 dual memory keys without indicators and Handsfree capability M7310N memory key assignments Line 1 Line Pool Line Pool Conf tran Call Fwd Call Fwd mune sen Pick Up Pick Up Y
224. o camp a call to a telephone that CALLBACK already has a camped call The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to re connect to the call On the M7100N T7100 telephone just pick up the handset 21 DHE The person to whom you redirected a call CALLBACK has Do Not Disturb activated The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to re connect to the call On the M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones just pick up the handset Camr denied You have tried to camp an internal call You can only camp external calls Camp to Dial the number of the internal telephone CANCEL to which the call is to be sent Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Routing calls 255 Answering a camped call Camred 21 CALLBACK Line 1 hung ur Hot in service CALLBACK Release 3 call The telephone to which you camped a call did not answer the call The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to re connect to the call On the M7100N T7100 telephone just pick up the handset A call you camped has come back to you but the caller hung up before you could re connect The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service or is being used for programming The call has come back to you Press CALLBACK or the line key to re connect to the call On the M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones just pick up the handset The line that the campe
225. o unanswered at the telephone monitored by System answer called the attendant extension System Answer answers the call and plays a greeting It then puts the call on hold until someone retrieves it If the caller knows the internal number they want to reach or is using the Compact Plus remote feature they can dial the number during the System Answer greeting If the caller dials the extension number of the attendant telephone the call is put on hold The greeting is not repeated System Answer monitors all external calls that appear as a flashing line key on the attendant telephone including answer keys and external calls that have been transferred After System Answer has played the greeting the call is put on hold at the same line indicator where it first appeared System Answer does not answer calls from internal extensions Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Auto Attendant 189 Custom Call Routing CCR CCR groups The job of answering and transferring calls can be taken over by CCR When someone calls on lines monitored by CCR the system answers the call and plays your recorded greeting Callers using a tone dial set can then e direct their call by pressing a digit as instructed by your greeting for example to reach our salespeople press 4 e enter an internal telephone number a fast way for regular callers to reach someone directly e access remote features e reach an atten
226. odial key for an external number 1 Press fi The display briefly shows Extertil autodial then Press a key 2 Press the key you want to programme This step is not necessary on the T7100 or the M7100N telephone which have only one memory key 3 If you want this autodial key to use a particular line or line pool select that line or press the key labelled Intercom and enter the line pool code or destination code Note The keystation must be assigned with the lines or line pools 4 Enter the number Press or GK when you are finished The display shows Programmed Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Saving time with features 281 Autodial key for an extension number 1 Press 2 The display briefly shows Intern autodial then Press a ken 2 Press the key you want to programme The display shows Extn This step is not necessary on M7100N T7100 telephones which have only one memory key 3 Enter the number The display shows Programmed For the M7100N T7100N telephones an external autodialler can only be programmed using a line and not a line pool If you do not include a line selection in an Autodial number the call uses your Prime line if you have one Note If line pool access codes or destination codes are changed remember to re programme autodial numbers as well Displays 387 QUIT BESP OF Autodial full key erased Enter digits QUIT OK Intercom _ QUIT
227. og at each extension You must use a three digit number for example 020 to give each extension 20 spaces Press YES to accept the settings and end programming The system automatically reallocates log space Press HO to reset the number of spaces allocated to each log An Alarm telephone displays system alarm codes should they occur You can determine which telephone receives the alarms The default is extension 221 The Alarm telephone must have a two line display The Alarm telephone must be an M7310N or M7324N telephone See Recording and reporting alarm codes on page 204 for information on the alarm codes l Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp extris Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 142 Programming feature settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music 8 Press until the display shows AlarmExtn 9 Press CHAHGE 10 Enter the extension number or press CLE to set the Alarm telephone to None 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Answer extension The Answer extns setting in Termin
228. ogram buttons on each telephone in a group This feature allows a group of users to see and answer incoming calls on any telephone in the group You can program the telephone keys while you are setting up the telephones or the user can program this feature to keys with a display at any time However all telephones in an answer group should have the same keys assigned to the same SWCA feature code Refer to Changing the key programming for an extension on page 112 for general information about setting or changing key programming for a telephone SWCA keys can be assigned to memory keys using feature codes 0 to 6J You can define how lines will associate to these keys under Feature Settings The Auto Associate setting allows you to determine if calls will automatically be associated with assigned SWCA keys Y or if the user will have to press the Hold button to have the line move to a SWCA key N As well you can determine if a call put on hold on a SWCA key can be picked up by other members in the group Invoke by Hold Y or if the call remains exclusive to the telephone where the call was put on hold Invoke by Hold N See Changing the key programming for an extension on page 112 for general information about setting or changing key programming for a telephone SWCA keys can be assigned to memory keys using feature codes 520 to 535 See Using SWCA line buttons on page 236 for information about using SWCA
229. ollowing feature codes can be accessed using the Basic password USER User preferences settings allow you to programme telephone model key assignment User speed dial Call log options Dialling options Language Display contrast and Ring type 6 B TIME Time and Date settings let you change any of the settings for hour minutes seconds year month and day Programmable settings and features Compact Plus has several features to assist you in assuring that calls do not go unanswered or do not get lost For example extensions can be programmed to provide back up answering for other extensions or lines You can also create an attendant position to provide answering for a group of extensions You can forward calls that are unanswered pick up calls for other extensions redirect selected lines to telephones inside or outside your business and have calls answered from any extension during non business or off peak hours Many call capture features are pre configured with your Compact Plus system Others however must be programmed in order to take full advantage of their flexibility The following programming settings are used to enhance answering and handling calls Do Not Disturb on busy Call Forward all calls Forward on Busy Call Pickup Directed Forward No Answer Call Pickup Group Hunt groups Callback Pickup Group Call Queuing Prime extension Do Not Disturb DND Prime line
230. om occupied to Vacant P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 54 Programming Hospitality Services Room condition with a room extension To update the Room condition using a room extension 1 Press 6 on a digital telephone Press Recall 8 7 6 on an analogue telephone 2 At the prompt enter the status of the room Press on the dialpad to indicate Set to sru done If required enter the Room condition password or Press on the dialpad to indicate Set to needs sru If required enter the Room condition password 4 On display telephones the display reads Set to sr done or Set to needs sry On M7000 T7000 telephones or an analogue telephone replace the handset to exit Room condition with a Hospitality service admin telephone To update or query the Room condition using a Hospitality services admin telephone 1 Press on a two line display telephone 2 If configured the display reads PFassword Enter the Desk admin password 3 The display reads Cd of rm Enter the room number and press DE 4 The display reads rrrrr Vacant Press the CHAHGE display key and select the required status for the room extension if the room is occupied select Srvc done or Heeds srac if the room is vacant select Vacant or Heeds src The default setting is Vacant 5 To update or query other room extensions press the FIME or HET display key and return to step 3 If there are no more
231. on hold for example tones or music Your telephone microphone is off so no one at the other end can hear anything in your office When the person you were talking to returns you hear them through your telephone speaker Lift the handset and talk With handsfree 1 2 3 If using the handset press the key labelled Handsfree Hang up the handset Press the key labelled Handsfree again Your microphone is off but you can hear when the caller returns When the caller returns press the key labelled handsfree or lift the handset P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 248 Holding calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Routing calls e Call Parking 250 e DIA calls 251 e Making a Priority call 253 e Transferring a call 253 e Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping 254 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 250 Routing calls Call Parking Call Parking allows you to suspend a call so that someone else can retrieve it from any telephone in the Compact Plus system You retrieve a parked call by dialling the retrieval code As many as nine calls can be parked at one time on the Compact Plus system When you park a call the system assigns one of nine codes for retrieval of the call These codes consist of the Call Parking prefix which may be any digit from 0 to 9 and a two digit cal
232. on the M7100N T7100 and M7000 T7000 telephones P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 260 Making external calls Allowing a colleague to join your conference Normally your calls are private You can turn Privacy off for a call allowing another person in your office with the same line to press the line key and join in a conference or a two way call 1 While on a call press GB 2 Tell the other person to press the line key and join your conversation Only two Norstar BST telephones in addition to the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Disconnecting one person from the conference You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue talking to the other On T7208 T7316 T7316E M7208N M7310N or M7324N telephones 1 Press the line key of the call that you want to disconnect The call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold 2 Press J The first call is disconnected 3 Press the line key of the held call to speak to the remaining person On a T7100 M7100N T7000 M7000 telephones 1 Press to place one caller on hold 2 Press again to put the caller you want to keep on hold 3 Press J The first call is disconnected 4 Press to speak to the remaining party Using Hold on a conference If you use Hold on a conference you can e put the two other people on hold they cannot speak to each other e put the conference on
233. oops Each of these loops consists of two separate B channels that can be used to make two simultaneous voice or data calls or one data call and one voice call A video call requires the use of both B channels on the loop Your installer configures the BRI loops for the Compact Plus system ISDN applications Using the appropriate ISDN terminal equipment you can access a wide range of business applications e Videoconferencing and video telephony Videoconferencing offers instant visual and audio contact between distant parties using either studio based or desktop ISDN terminals e Desktop conferencing ISDN allows computer users in distant locations to share and edit any image data or text file on their own computer screen while simultaneously discussing the information e File transfer ISDN allows you to transfer files containing data text image or audio clips faster and cheaper than with a conventional modem e Home working Convenient retrieval processing and storage of files is possible for the home worker using ISDN lines to give high speed access to information held in the office e Group 4 fax ISDN fax applications pride cost savings by increasing transmission speed and quality of resolution e Remote LAN access ISDN provides an affordable and fast means for workers in remote sites at home or branch offices to access local area networks LANs e Leased circuit back up Essential back up for leased KiloStre
234. or analogue telephone connected to an ATA or an AEM e Hospitality Services admin telephone An HS admin telephone is any two line display telephone such as the T7316 T7316E M7310N or M7324N An HS admin telephone can be programmed to prompt for a Desk admin password before access to HS admin features is granted To change the Desk admin password see Hospitality passwords on page 174 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Hospitality Services 49 Alarm time AL feature The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on Norstar BST telephones and analogue telephones connected to an ATA Both room extensions and common extensions can be programmed to sound an audible alert at a requested time One Alarm time within a 24 hour period is programmable on a room or common extension and must be reset daily When the alarm sounds all telephones in a given room alert Cancelling the alarm on any telephone cancels the alarm on all the telephones in the room A new Alarm time entered on a room or common extension overwrites any alarm set previously If the Compact Plus system experiences a mains failure the failure can result in missed Alarm times When the Compact Plus system is running and the system time resets the missed Alarm times alert on respective room or common extensions At all times the Compact Plus system allows up to a maximum of 24 extensions that can alert at the same t
235. or the contrast level you want or if you have a two line telephone press UF and DOWH to adjust the contrast 3 Press or OK to set the new contrast level Key Inquiry Ensure that the function of a key matches its label by pressing 0 and then the key to display its function On the M7100N T7100 telephones Key Inquiry shows your extension number followed by the function assigned to your single memory key To find out your extension number use the Key Inquiry feature CJ 0 on an intercom key Displays Hai Lineggl The display shows the number and name of SHOW OK the line Press SHOW to view the redirection status of the line 1234567839012345 Press or press WIEW or JIEW to view a LIEU DE number that is too long to fit on the display Press or Gk when you are done 21 lt SETHAME gt The display shows the directory number of HEXT HIEU the telephone and the assigned name Press HEXT to see the first line assigned to ring at the intercom key Feature name gt The name of the feature assigned to a key SHOW OE is displayed when you press the key Press or SHOW for additional information Press a keu Press the key you want to check Press EXIT or EXIT when you are finished P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 226 Customising your telephone Labelling keys on the telephone After programming a key on your telephone you may wish to label it Norstar M series
236. ord Press Next The display shows User f1t and the current setting If you are changing the user filter press CHAHGE The display shows User fltri Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter Press Next The display shows Line f1tr and the current setting If you are changing the line filter press CHAHGE The display shows Line fltri Enter the two digit number of an existing dialling filter Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 91 Changing an existing COS password To maintain the security of a Class of Service password it is a good idea to change it frequently l Sg E A eS 9 10 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show _ The display shows COS rsuds Press Show _ The display shows Show Pswd Enter the password number of the COS password you want to change 00 to 99 Press Show _ The display shows Psu followed by the number you chose and the current password Press CHANGE Enter six digits for the new password Press 8 to exit or to continue programming C
237. ord can be used by internal and external users therefore you must assign restrictions for the user instead of for the extension 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press e 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows Passwords 5 Press Show The display shows COS Fauds 6 Press Show The displays shows Show Fasud 3 7 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 8 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 88 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 9 10 11 12 Press Next _ The display shows User flt Press CHAHGE Enter the number for the restriction filter to be applied with this COS password Press to exit or to continue programming Assigning line restrictions to the COS password l Rs SS E e 10 11 12 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Presse 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuordi Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Term inals amp extrs Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show _ The display shows COS Fsuds Press Show _ The displays sh
238. ou are connected to that call If you press any other key including keys used to show more information about a call you exit the Call Information feature and the key you pressed performs its normal function P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 290 Using display features Call Information symbols Only incoming calls can be logged Calls preceded by are outgoing and cannot be logged Symbol Description Indicates the number of the telephone you called not an incoming call Press or LIEU to see the rest of the number You cannot use another feature until you exit the Call Information feature x The number is incomplete missing digits ra The number shown is too long The last 14 digits are shown following the 4 The call shown in the Call Log has been answered Call Log If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment and you have subscribed to the Call Information feature supplied by your service provider you can capture information about incoming callers in your Call Log The same feature is supplied by an ISDN service package that comes with Calling Line Identification CLID You can protect the privacy of your Call Log by assigning a password A handy feature of the Call Log is that you can easily use it to place calls to the numbers recorded Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls For each call the log could
239. ou assign a different remote package to each line in your system L001 Rem pkg l OC CON I oy a B 11 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press Terri Press Press Press Press Press Press 7 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extns Next _ until the display shows Sastem Frarming Show _ The display shows Hunt 3raurs Next _ until the display shows Remote access Show _ The display shows Remote access Fkgs Next _ The display shows Fem line access Show _ The display shows Show linei Enter the line number or press LIST to see line 001 Press CHAHGE Enter the number for the remote package that will apply to the line whenever it is used by a remote caller Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 186 Remote access Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Auto Attendant e Auto Attendant 188 e System Answerv 188 e Custom Call Routing CCR 189 e CCR groups 189 e Direct extension dialling 190 e Customising System Answer and CCR 190 e Turning System Answer on or off 191 e Turning CCR on or off 191 e Choosing the attendant telephone 191 e Setting the n
240. ou have Do Not Disturb activated at your telephone Call Forward on Busy automatically passes the call to another extension If the extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward on Busy feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue to ring until the hunt time has expired A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on Busy extension l Nn 2 T1 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press L 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Ek tns Press Show _ The display shows Show extras Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answers Press Next The display shows Fud on buss Press Show _ The display shows Fud to Press CHAHGE and enter the extension number you want to receive the calls Press ELE to change the destination back to Hore Press to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 101 Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in your telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call If you find this second ring distracting you can have the system pre
241. ou may encounter a problem with your Compact Plus system either from internal or external causes You need to know the following e the alarm extension that displays messages when there are problems e how to recognise and clear hung lines e when a power failure occurs and what happens with the system When there is a problem the Compact Plus system generates a message called an alarm code on the Alarm extension You assign a T7316 T7316E M7310N or an M7324N telephone to be the alarm extension they have two line displays If an alarm code appears on the Alarm extension s display Record the alarm code Press TIME and record the time displayed Call the Advice Line and report the alarm code Fe ER a After speaking to the support person press CLEAR Clearing lines A line is hung when it remains busy even when no conversation or data communication is taking place and it cannot be disconnected by normal means Lines can become hung when exchange lines are connected to AC15A private circuits Lines connected to a device such as an answering machine a fax machine or a modem can also become hung It is a matter of judgement to decide whether a line is hung or simply in use When a line is busy you see a solid indicator next to the line key and the message Line in use when you attempt to select the line If a line is the only line in a line pool and it is busy a solid indicator appears next to the line pool key an
242. ows Shaw Fasuwe 3 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password Press Next until the display shows Line f1t Press CHANGE Enter the number for the restriction that applies to the line when this COS password is used Press to exit or to continue programming Assigning a remote package to the COS password 1 One oy ET oe Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Ternminals amp extris Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Show The displays shows Show Fasud 3 Enter a two digit password 00 to 99 Press Show The display shows the setting for that COS password Press Next until the display shows Remote pkai Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 89 10 Press CHAHGE 11 Enter the number of the remote package that applies with this COS password 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Assigning a remote access filter People on other systems in your private network can dial into your system over ACI5A private circuits or exchange lines and make outgoing calls from your system Therefore you may want to limit the nu
243. plug a Norstar BST telephone into the jack Refer to your telephony technician to get the jack rewired for a Norstar system telephone if you need to add a Norstar BST telephone at that location 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next until the display shows System Fr9rming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 3rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Extn relocatni 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Y Yes or N No 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Copying programming for telephones During programming you can copy certain programmed settings from one line to another or from one telephone to another using the COPY key when it appears on the display You can copy either system programming or system programming and personal programming Personal programming includes the settings programmed by people at their own telephones using feature codes You can only copy personal programming between telephones of the same type when both are plugged into the system See Chart 15 Copying settings on page 327 in Appendix A for a programming overview P
244. r the PC that is capable of performing text to speech synthesis The volume and speed of the synthesized speech can be adjusted by the user The analogue mixer card is an add on for the PC that takes the analogue signal from the voice synthesizer and mixes it with the headset audio output from the M7324N extension The result is sent to the headset port of the mixer card The mixer card does not provide any volume control To use the VIOC function the display language needs to be set to Operating See Changing the display language on page 115 for instructions Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 219 Common feature display messages You may see the following displays when using a feature Access denied Denied in admin Feature timeout Inactive feature Invalid code Hot available Set locked 1234567598125 WIEW OF 2590221 221 TRAHSFER 221 calling Call 2217 YES HO Camred 221 CALLBACK Lineal TRAM SFE Linegg1 221 Someone is already using programming or the feature you are trying to use is not compatible with the configuration of the telephone or line You have tried to use a feature but you have not been given access to it in programming You have taken more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display You have entered a feature code that is used by an application programme that your system does not have
245. rFitality in System pr9rmina replace dialling filters set under Services The RO feature does not apply to common extensions The RO feature uses the following room states Vacant Basic Mid and Full A variety of dialling filters can be configured for each room states The default setting is Vacant e Vacant Room is empty e Basic Room is occupied and occupants can access basic callout features e Mid Room is occupied and occupants can access basic callout features plus other specified features for instance toll free calling e Full Room is occupied and occupants can access all call features allowed on the system Programming the state of a room extension To access the Room Occupancy feature and assign the state of a room extension 1 Press P on a two line display telephone 2 If configured the display reads Fassword Enter the Desk admin password 3 The display reads Oc of rm Enter the room number and press OF or LIST 4 The display reads rrrrr Vacant Press the CHAHGE display key and select the required status for the room extension Vacant Basic Mid or Full The default setting is Vacant 5 To programme other rooms press the FIHO or HEXT display key and return to step 3 If no more rooms require programming press the key to exit programming Note Programming a room to Vacant state cancels any outstanding alarms Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programmi
246. re a caller hears the CCR greeting 192 Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group 193 Using the pre recorded greetings 194 Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 194 Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 196 Programming or changing CCR destinations 197 Testing your custom System Answer and CCR 197 Maintenance 199 Beginning a Maintenance session 200 Checking the system version of the software 201 System Administration Log record 201 Troubleshooting 203 Recording and reporting alarm codes 204 Clearing lines 204 Power failure 205 Power fail telephone 206 SECTION Ill Using telephone features 207 About your system telephones 209 T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs 210 T7316 Business Series Terminal key defaults 213 M7324N telephone and CAPN 214 M7310N telephone 215 M7208N T7208 telephones 216 M7100N T7100 telephones 217 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide vil M7000 T7000 telephones 217 Release key 218 Visually Impaired Operator Console 218 Common feature display messages 219 Customising your telephone 223 Dialling mode 224 Display contrast 225 Key Inquiry 225 Moving line keys 226 Ring type 227 Ring volume 227 Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys 227 Using personal features 229 Background music 230 Do Not Disturb 230 Personal Speed Dial codes 231 Using Speed Dial 231 Answering calls 233 Answering a call 234 Sor
247. rect dial telephone is on another system in a private network it is still considered an external number by the system Use the private network dialing string for that extension in this field 10 Press CHAHGE then enter up to 24 digits for the external number 11 Press QE The display shows the number you have entered 12 Press Next The display shows the facility 13 Press CHAHGE until the display shows the facility you want Options are Use prime line Use line Pool code or Use routing tabl ATTENTION If you want to be able to forward calls to an external direct dial telephone the facility needs to be set to use the routing table or a prime line where the prime line is set to Intercom 14 If you choose Use line or Pool code you must enter a line number or pool code If you choose Use routing tabl you must enter a destination code 15 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 78 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions e Using restriction filters to bar calls 80 e Assigning filters to a telephone Extn restrns 83 e Assigning filters to a line Line restrns 84 e Assigning filters to a line extension Line extn restrns 85 e Class of Service passwords 86 e Assigning a remote
248. red Note the differences between Line redirection and Call Forward Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at your telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify no matter which telephones they appear on to a telephone outside the Compact Plus system Line redirection takes precedence over Call Forward Overriding Call Forward If you telephone someone who has their calls forwarded to your extension your call rings at that person s telephone In this way you can still communicate with the forwarded extension Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Forwarding calls 275 External Call forward Users can set individual extensions to forward calls using Call Forward All Calls CFAC You can also program to enable extensions to automatically Forward Busy CFB or Forward No Answer CFNA External Call Forward ECF is a feature that allows the same call forwarding features to forward to external destinations To allow ECF the individual extensions must e have access to a line pool e be programmed to Allow Redirect under Terminals Ektns Festrictions Cextns 1 ISDN and Network Call Diversion On a Norstar system with ETSI ISDN lines Call Forward features have a slight variation in naming convention The functions remain the same Features are labelled as follows e Call Forward Unconditional CFU implemented on No
249. rence and leave the other two parties connected Unsupervised Conference by pressing TRANSFER or entering the Transfer feature code Press held line You have activated the Conference feature with one call active and another on hold Press the line of the call on hold to bring that person into the conference Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Making external calls 263 Using Class of Service passwords Class of Service COS passwords permit controlled access to a system s resources by internal and remote users When you enter a COS password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with your COS password apply rather than the normal restriction filters Similarly when a remote user enters a COS password on an incoming Auto answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their COS password apply rather than the normal restriction filters and remote package The COS passwords are programmed by either your customer sales support officer or installer Users should memorise their COS passwords instead of writing them down COS passwords should be deleted when employees leave the company Typically each user has a separate password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords Changing your COS password You must enter a COS password each time you wish to make a call that is normally restricted on a line or telephone Changing t
250. ress 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display show Show extri Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next _ The display shows Carabilities Press Show _ The display shows Fwd no answer Press Next until the display shows ATA settings Press Show _ The display shows ATA ans timeri Press Nex The display shows ATA mode Press CHAHGE to choose Tone or Pulse Press to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 154 Settings for analogue equipment Setting whether the ATA I ATA should receive system tones You must tell the system whether the device connected to the ATA should receive confirmation and error tones These tones inform a person of call progress but confuse a modem or fax machine e Ifthe ATA is connected to a telephone set tones to Y e Ifthe ATA is connected to any other device set tones to N The default is No Note This setting does not interfere with intrusion and conference tones on a telephone connected to an ATA These tones are heard through the telephone handset regardless of the ATA tones setting 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2
251. rnal calls only Lines in your system can be programmed to have Automatic Privacy If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy only one person at a time can use the line If a line is not programmed with Automatic Privacy anyone with the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by pressing the line key Should another telephone join your call you hear a tone and see a message on the telephone display A telephone cannot join a call without this tone being heard If a line is not programmed with Automatic Privacy you can still use the Privacy feature by pressing after connecting an external call Note Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Answering calls 235 Creating a conference by releasing Privacy If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy you can turn privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in your conversation and form a conference All the rules applicable to a conference apply except there is only one line in use instead of the normal two This means that you cannot split a conference that was set up by releasing Privacy 1 After connecting an external call press GB 2 Tell the other person to press the line button and join your conversation Only two system telephones in addition to the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Answering the next queued call
252. rogramming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows System Frarming 5 Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours 6 Press Next until the display shows Featr settings 7 Press Show _ The display shows Backgrnd music 8 Press Next until the display shows Fark Mode 9 Press CHANGE to choose Lowest or Cycle 10 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 136 Programming feature settings Transfer callback If Transfer callback is enabled after a specified number of rings a transferred call that remains unanswered returns to the telephone that made the transfer Transfer callback allows you to enable disable this feature and to specify the number of rings before the call is returned when the feature is enabled You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings by three See Transferring a call on page 253 for information on the Transfer feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows Syst
253. room extensions updates or queries press the key to exit programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Hospitality Services 55 Service time The Service time heading of programming under Hosritality in System Fr9rming allows the installer or system administrator to programme the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required The Service time heading is an integral part of the Room condition RC feature l O oS Oy Er ES 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press C O N F 1 G The display reads Passuord Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display reads System Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows HosFitality Press Show _ The display shows Foon desk info Press Next _ until the display shows Serwice time Press Show _ The display shows Hour 44 Press the CHAHGE display key Enter the hour 00 to 23 If the number is less than 13 the display shows AM Press CHAHGE to select PM Press Next J The display shows Minutes 88 12 13 Press the CHAHGE display key Enter the minutes 00 to 59 Press the key to exit programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 56 Programming Hospitality Servi
254. rstar CFAC l e Call Forward on Busy CFoB implemented on Norstar CFB e Call Forward on No Response CFNR implemented on Norstar CFNA ISDN external lines use external Call Diversion if this is available from the local exchange User Programming Users cannot program individual extensions for CFB or CFNA Users can program their own extension to CFAC as follows Internal Call Forward Press at any extension followed by the internal number to which you want calls forwarded External Call Forward Press at any extension followed by the route or line pool code number and then the external number Note The destination or line pool code and dialing digits cannot exceed 24 digits The set must have access to a line pool and be programmed to Allow Redirect under Terminals Extns Restrictionstextns 2 to allow external destination programming using _ J 4 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 276 Forwarding calls Cancelling Call Forward To cancel Call Forward press a Line redirection In a networked system Line redirection allows you to redirect calls coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private circuits and exchange lines to exchange lines Compact Plus supports simultaneous redirection of DIA calls subject to the same barring rules an
255. rt 14 Extension relocation System Fr9rming SHOW Hunt Srours HEXT AA Featr settings SHOW Back9rnd music MEXT 17 times Extn relocatn Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Chart 15 Copying settings Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn Enter extension number 221 221 Press COPY Press CHANGE to choose between SYSTEM data C SYSTEM dat pa shia and 5YSTEM USER HEXT MEST COPY SS INGLE Press CHANGE to select SIHGLE RANGE or ALL Copy tor If SINGLE or RANGE is selected enter extension number s as prompted P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 328 Charts Chart 16 ATA settings Terminals Extns SHOW Show extn Enter extension number for the ATA or I ATA SHOW Line access it HEXT Carabilities SHOW Fug no answer HEXT 14 times ATA settings is SHOW ATA ans timer Press CHANGE to select 3 5 7 or 14 seconds MEST ATA mode Press CHANGE to choose between Tone and Pulse HEST ATA tones Press CHAHGE to choose between Yes and H No HEST ATA use i Press CHANGE to choose between On site and Off site Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 329 Chart 17 Ringing service Services SHOW AA Ringing service SHOW Ringing 9rours i HEAT Sched sight SHOW Service Press CHANGE to select from
256. s Terminals Exths Lines Services Sus speed dial Passwords Time Date System ereaming Call services Software Keus Maintenance Usage Metrics Assign settings to each telephon e Assign settings to each internal external and DIA line Create services such as night ringing routing and restrictions for making external calls Create Speed Dial codes that can be used by any extension in the system View and change passwords for programming and features Set the time and date on the system clock Change system wide settings Auto Attendant and custom call routing programming Assign settings for external voice message services Upgrade a restricted Feature Cartridge or activate the Remote Administration feature using key codes View diagnostic information about the system View statistical information about Hunt group calls Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 25 Each main heading has sub headings within it For example Terminals amp Extns has six sub headings Line access Capabilities Name User preferences Restrictions and Call services Using the System Administrator Plus password you programme settings for the entire system as well as settings for individual extensions Programming affects system operation Only a qualified installer or sales support officer should perform start up installation and maintenance programming Some of
257. s in a dialling sequence If your Compact Plus system is connected to a host system a private branch exchange PBX for example you can use a Recall signal to access special features such as PBX Call Forward and PBX Transfer While you are on a call or programming an Autodial key press IW Run Stop inserts a break point into an Autodial or Speed Dial number This may be necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar host system For example you may call a company with an automated receptionist that instructs you to dial the extension number you need You can programme the company number a Run Stop then the extension number on one external Autodial key Press the Autodial key once to dial the company number When you hear the automated receptionist press the Autodial key again to dial the extension number The Run Stop symbol T uses one of the 24 spaces in an Autodial or Speed Dial sequence You can include up to three Run Stop commands in a dialling string The system ignores a fourth Run Stop and any digits or commands that follow it in a programmed dialling sequence P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 300 Special dialling features Press RJ while programming a dialling sequence Wait for Dial Tone Wait for Dial Tone causes a sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial This is useful if you must dial a remote system and t
258. s password is 7 2 7 7 which spells SAPLUS on the keypad 1 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password i 2 Enter 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns Three triangular indicators B appear on the vertical display between the rows of keys 3 Place the programming overlay over the keys pointed to by the indicators gt Entering programming using the Administrator password The Administrator password is your key to Administration programming Most of the programming in this guide can be entered with the Administrator password The default Administrator password is 2 B 6 4 6 which spells ADMIN on the telephone keypad Entering programming using the Basic password The Basic password allows you to do day to day maintenance of individual telephones without allowing access to sensitive programming The default Basic password is 2 2 7 4 2 which spells BASIC on the telephone keypad You do not enter Basic programming using 2 6 6 8 J 4 4 CONFIG Instead you enter the Feature code that you want to program followed by 2 2 7 4 2 BASIC For example 1 Press followed by the code 2 Enter 2 2 7 4 2 BASIC Follow the instructions on the display and make your selections using the display keys Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 3 The f
259. s the outgoing resource permits Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Forwarding calls 277 You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the middle of programming Line redirection but none of the Norstar call handling features are available until the feature times out If you need to use a Compact Plus feature to process the call quit Line redirection programming by pressing J Do not press CC or you will disconnect the call you are trying to process While you are programming Line redirection you do not receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone Be careful to avoid redirection loops If for example you redirect your lines to your branch office and your branch office redirects its lines to you you can create a redirection loop In certain situations callers may experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an external location Redirecting your lines 1 Press a 2 Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls 3 Do one of the following to indicate where the line will be redirected maximum 24 digits e Enter the number from the dial pad including routing codes e press an auto dial key that has the number programmed if the number is on a Saved Number Redial or Last Number Redial key press that memory key 4 Press or OK Note If the outgoing line is a private network line that does not require you to
260. s you to assign physical lines and Direct Inward Access DIA lines to each extension DIA lines are assigned and removed in the same manner as other lines 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press three times The display shows Shaw lines 7 Enter the line number The display shows LnnntUnassigned 8 Press SCAH to see the setting and then press SCAH again to view the lines assigned to this extension 9 Press CHANGE to change the setting for each line Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned or Ring only Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions 41 10 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming In general exchange lines are not assigned to telephones If assigned they are used for monitoring incoming call usage or for making outgoing calls You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a key with an indicator on that extension If you set a line to Ring only incoming calls appear on an intercom key A Central Answeri
261. sages 219 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 210 About your system telephones Your Norstar telephone system is simple and flexible You can use many features with just a few key presses and view what is happening by reading the telephone display You can choose which of its features you want to have available make them work the way that suits you best and assign the features you use frequently to the keys on your telephone The current time and date appear on the display of idle Norstar BST telephones T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs The T7316E BST telephone has a two line display three display keys 16 memory keys with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators This keystation has handsfree ability accessed from a button located under the dialpad Also under the dial pad are a mute key that mutes for all features and a headset key which allows the user to attach a headset and direct the call to the headset or the handset without needing to disconnect the headset Line numbering starts on button 09 T7316E The default button assignments for the T7316E depend on the template applied Refer to your Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of telephones T7316E BST upper buttons PBXtemplate PBX template 01 Contrast 05 l 02 Show Time 06 03 g 07 Send _ 04 08 Speed dial Compact Plus Sy
262. sed greetings for System Answer and CCR You can record your own versions of any user greetings and pre recorded greetings You can also turn off any user or pre recorded greeting l 10 11 12 Press B Jand enter 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Auto att 9rtnas Press CHANGE if you want to turn the greeting off A greeting that is turned off is not erased The time used by the greeting will not be returned to the 96 second time pool Press Show _ The display shows Grt A mode User Press PLAY to play the company greeting A Press REC to record a company greeting As soon as you press REC the previous recording will be erased Making a recording of less than two seconds duration will also erase a greeting Press OK when you have completed your recording A company greeting is the first greeting your callers hear To continue recording messages press HEXT then REC to record the business closed greeting B Press OK when you have completed your recording Example Our business hours are 8 a m to 5 p m Monday through Friday To continue recording messages press HEST then REC to record the caller menu greeting C The greeting used with the caller menu indicates the destinations you have chosen for each digit Example To reach one of our sales agents press 1 To contact our accounting office press 2 To talk to an attendant press 0 To repeat this menu press
263. settings from one remote package to another The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool identifier followed by a numeric line pool access code in parentheses for example FaolA 3 3 4 If no access code has been identified there is nothing between the brackets for example FoolA 11H The line pool access code can be programmed under Terminals amp Extns Remote access package 00 is the default setting for the Remote access package setting It does not permit access to line pools or to remote paging Unlike packages 01 to 15 package 00 cannot be changed You can define up to 15 remote access packages 01 to 15 For remote users who call into the Compact Plus system to use lines for calling out the remote restrictions and line restrictions still apply Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Remote access 183 To use features on a Norstar system remotely press followed by the feature code Even if you are calling from another Norstar system press instead of Ce Line Pool access 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display shows Sastem Frarmina Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next _ until the display shows Remote acc
264. ss 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 9 On hold 7 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals amp Extrs Next _ until the display shows System Frarmina Show _ The display shows Hunt 3raurs Next _ until the display shows Featr settings Show _ The display shows Back9rnd musics Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press to exit or to continue programming You can choose what a caller hears when the call has been put on hold Note In systems networked with private circuits it is a good idea to have callers hear tones on all systems on the private network Otherwise callers who are transferred across the private network may hear a confusing variety of music tones and silence 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press Terri Press Press Press Press et oS Press 7 7 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows nals Extns Nex J until the display shows System Frarmina Show _ The display shows Hunt 3raurs Next until the display shows Featr settings Show _ The display shows Back9rnd musics Next until the display shows On holdi Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming feature settings 133 Receiver volume Camp timeout 9 Press CHAHGE to choose Tones Music or Silence 10
265. ssidy s telephone has an Answer key for Miss Vale When Miss Vale s telephone rings Mr Cassidy can answer it on his telephone by pressing the Answer key Miss Vale s extension has been assigned as an Answer extension on Mr Cassidy s telephone Simply press the Answer key when you hear the other person s telephone ringing See Answer keys on page 242 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 35 Call Forward all calls If you know you are going to be away from your telephone for a while forward your calls to another extension Otherwise the callers must wait for the Forward No Answer feature to automatically transfer the call after several rings For example Mr Forbes knows that most client calls arrive in the morning but he will be in meetings until noon He forwards his extension to Ms Smith who can deal with issues right away Press then the extension number that you wish to send the calls to If your extension is a member of a hunt group the Call Forward all calls setting is overridden by the hunt group routing See Forwarding all calls on page 274 Call Pickup Directed If any telephone is ringing in your office you can answer it from your extension For example only a few people are in the office early in the morning When Miss Vale s telephone rings Mr Forbes takes the call using Call Pickup Directed Press 6 J then dial the extension of the telephone that is
266. ssue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 106 Programming capabilities Assigning telephones to the Direct Dial extension This setting allows you to programme which Direct Dial extensions the telephone can call Direct Dial extension numbers and the digits you use to reach Direct Dial telephones are programmed in System programming See Assigning a Direct Dial extension on page 75 Direct Dial extensions are usually a receptionist for your office or for a particular department You can change which Direct Dial telephone an extension is assigned to including none at all Any number of telephones can be assigned to call the Direct Dial telephone See Chart 11 Extension capabilities 3 on page 324 in Appendix A for a programming overview See Accessing a Direct Dial extension on page 266 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Ertns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The displays shows rhin 6 Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer 7 Press until the display shows D Dial 8 Press CHAHGE to select Extn1 or None 9 Press 4 to exit or to continue programming Compac
267. ssue 01 Programming Terminals and Extensions 45 Every Answer extension number assigned to the telephone automatically assigns an Answer key with an indicator to the telephone These keys should be labelled accordingly identifying the telephone with its name or extension number More than one telephone can have an Answer key for the same extension number In this way more than one telephone can provide Call Alerting and Call Answering for any calls directed to that extension number A private line does not generate alerting at an Answer key Note You cannot assign Answer extension numbers to an M7000 T7000 M7100N T7100 telephones or to a single line telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter ATA See Answer keys on page 242 for information on using Answer keys Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension Outgoing calls on a Direct Inward Access DIA line use an Originating Line Identification OLD number which appears on the telephone display of the called party as part of the calling line identification CLID Compact Plus allows you to programme the OLI number for each extension The OLI number could be the Public Received number for the DIA line assigned to the extensions or it could be a different Public Received number if you wish calls to be returned to someone else s extension Ensure that the OLI numbers are in the same range as the received digits that come from the exchange
268. stem Administration 9 Introduction Safety and Regulatory information 12 You must be the administrator 13 Here s what you need to start programming 13 Understanding the telephone keys 15 Starting a programming session 18 Ending a programming session 19 Using passwords to access programming 19 Understanding your system 20 Map of Administrator Plus programming 20 SECTION II System programming 23 Conventions used in this guide 24 Programming overview 24 Using passwords 29 Programmable settings and features 31 Making suggestions 38 Advice Line 38 Programming Terminals and Extensions Terminals and extensions 40 Assigning a line to an extension line access 40 Assigning line pool access 42 Assigning a Prime line to an extension 42 Assigning intercom keys to an extension 43 Assigning an Answer key to an extension 44 Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension 45 Programming Hospitality Services Hospitality extensions 48 Alarm time AL feature 49 Hospitality Services admin alarm feature 51 Room occupancy RO 52 Room condition RC 53 Service time 55 Software Keys Viewing the System ID 58 Software Keys 58 Setting System speed dial Setting System speed dial 62 Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 62 Selecting a line 63 Setting the system to display a name instead of a number 63 Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions 65 11 39 47 57 61 P
269. stem Administration Guide 16 Introduction M7310N M7324N The following table describes the various items 1 keypad Used for dialling numbers when you are making calls and for entering numbers and letters when you are programming 2 Display Shows instructions for using and programming the telephone Display key Activates the instruction that appears on the display above the display key 4 Memory key Activates a number or feature code stored in the key Dual memory key Can store two numbers or feature codes M7310N only O Shit key Press the Shift key before a dual memory key to activate the number or feature code stored in the secondary memory of the dual memory key M7310N only Feature key Allows you to enter a feature code while using or programming the Le Feature or Fx telephone Hold key Puts an active call on hold e Hold Release key CJ Ris se Hangs up an active call or ends programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Introduction 17 D Mute key Mutes handset and microphone TE Only available on T7316 and T7316E keystations D Handsfree key Turns on speaker so user does not have to pick up handset or use headset as Only available on T7316E keystations B Headset key Allows user to use switch between headset and handset answer mode without removing headse
270. stem Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 211 Hybrid template Square template 01 Contrast 05 SavedNo 01 Contrast 05 SvaNredia 02 Show Time 06 Sys Park 02 Show Time 06 Sys Park 03 Privacy 07 Send Msg 03 Privacy 07 Send Msg 04 08 Speed dial 04 08 Speed dial T7316E BST lower buttons PBX template 09 sysPak J 47 Caltimer J 10 Saved No 18 Ring Again 11 Call Fwd 19 DND _ 12 Pick Up 20 Conf lrans 13 Page 21 last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 15 TimeDate 23 Intercom 16 Receive msg 24 Intercom Square template Hybrid template 09 Line lt xx gt 17 Cal Timer 09 Line lt xx gt 17 Call Timer 10 Line lt xx gt 18 Ring Again 10 Line Pool 18 Ring Again 11 Line lt xx gt 19 IDND 11 Call Fwd 19 DND 12 Line lt xx gt 20 Conf Trans 12 Pick Up 20 Conf Trans 13 Page 21 Last No 13 Page 21 Last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 14 Transfer 22 Voice Call 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 16 Receive msg 24 Intercom 16 Receive msg 24 Intercom Central Answering Position CAP The T7316E can be used alone or you can exp
271. striction within a filter Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter but the filter itself is not removed Removing a restriction changes the identifying number of the restriction Removing a restriction removes the overrides associated with it and changes the identifying number of the restriction For example removal of restriction 01 re numbers restrictions 01 to 08 as 01 to 07 Applying restriction filters Once you create the filters you can assign the restrictions to a telephone under Terminals amp Extns to a line under Lines to a particular line on a telephone under Terminals amp Extns and to remote callers under Remote access To assign restriction filters for different times of the day see Restriction service on page 160 See Chart 6 Restriction filters on page 319 in Appendix A for a programming overview l Un 6 7 8 9 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 BJT SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Exths Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next until the display shows Restrictions Press Show The display shows Restrn fi
272. sword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extnt i 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr 6 Press twice The display shows Line assignment Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Terminals and Extensions 43 7 Press until the display shows Prime line 8 Press CHAHGE to select the setting None Pool A or Intcm intercom Only assigned lines and line pools appear 9 Press 8 to exit or to continue programming An assigned Prime line is not associated with the assignment of a Prime extension An exchange line must be assigned to the extension in Line assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to the extension A line pool must be assigned to the extension in line pool access before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line to the extension By assigning a line pool as a Prime line an extension can be made to search automatically for an idle line in a pool Note If you set Prime line to Intcm intercom you can still access any line pools you have assigned to the extension When you enter the line pool access code the system searches for an idle line in that pool When all the lines in the pool are busy the display shows Ha free lines The system does not search from one pool to another Assigning interco
273. t a J Only available on T7316 and T7316E keystations Telephone programming buttons This guide shows the Business Series Terminal BST buttons The following table shows how the BST T series buttons compare with the Norstar telephones M series Button Name Lg T7316 T7208 T7100 MATON Ek M7208N Hold s es or Hold Ces T7000 wd M7000 Release 5 Jor Release Feature Fx or Feature To use a feature Press J Feature or Fx and enter the feature code For example Press R to access your mailbox Note The BST terminal programming keys have label tabs beside the buttons Entering numbers and letters using the keypad Use the keys on the telephone keypad to enter numbers and letters during programming When you enter programming or use a feature code the keys you press often spell a word For example when you press 2 6 6 8 4 4 the number keys spell CONFIG The C is on key number 2 the O is on key number 6 the N is also on key number 6 and so on However the display shows numbers instead of letters The word just provides an easy way to remember the sequence of numbers Entering names using the keypad When you want to use a key to spell a name such as naming a hunt group during programming the function of the key changes according to the number of times you press the key The following illus
274. t Disturb Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 About your system telephones 213 17316 Business Series Terminal key defaults The T7316 telephone has a two line display three display keys 16 memory keys with indicators eight memory keys without indicators and Handsfree capability The default button assignments for the T7316 Business Series Terminal BST depend on the template applied Refer to the Programming Record to identify the current button programming for each set or group of sets T7316 telephone Upper level programming keys Lower level programming but tons Note the button numbering for the upper buttons of this set They are mapped to the button settings from the M7310 telephone which has a set of dual memory buttons without displays However since there is no second level of memory for the buttons on this set the button numbers are not consecutive These examples show defaults for a system with three digit internal numbers The defaults do not actually exist on any telephone as no telephone has an autodial button for itself The position that would be taken by the autodial button for itself is blank T7316 BST upper buttons Button 23 Button 31 Set 231 Button 25 Button 33 Set 232 Button 27 Q Button 24 Set239 Button 29 6 Button 26 Set 240 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 214 About your system telephones
275. t Plus System Administration Guide 190 Auto Attendant When a call that was handled by CCR rings at your telephone call information appears automatically on the display You must subscribe to a Call Display service and have the proper equipment installed in your system for this feature to work Direct extension dialling Both System Answer and CCR give the caller the opportunity to dial an internal extension number or to use remote features such as Direct Inward System Access DISA This means callers do not have to wait to reach the person they are calling and only the person they are calling handles the call Customising System Answer and CCR You enable System Answer and CCR for your system and programme which lines can be answered with CCR usually incoming lines System Answer is available to answer calls to the attendant telephone usually the reception telephone It is a good idea to plan how you will customise System Answer and CCR before you start programming e Decide which telephone will be the attendant telephone where calls can be answered automatically and put on hold e Write down the greetings or scripts that you will record see examples in Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR on page 196 e Organise your telephones into groups and decide what number a caller will use to reach each group Using the groups and numbers you have created write down the greeting or script that the CC
276. t Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming capabilities 107 Allowing Priority call If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you have an urgent call for someone in your office you can interrupt their call using the Priority call feature By default telephones are not allowed to make Priority calls If you want a telephone to be able to make a Priority call you must programme Priority call for that telephone A person who receives a Priority call while on another call has eight seconds to accept or block the call For information on blocking calls see Do Not Disturb on page 230 If the person does nothing the Priority call feature puts their active call including conference parties on Exclusive Hold and connects your call See Making a Priority call on page 253 for information on using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Estns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rnn innr Press twice The display shows Fwd no answer Press until the display shows Priority calli Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming Un
277. t as adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council C The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel Networks declares that Compact ICS is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel Networks product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any pro
278. t or to continue programming System Administration Log record You can check under the 545 admin log heading to find a list of administrative events performed on Compact Plus Use the following table to record these log items whenever you run a Maintenance session 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press L 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extris 4 Press Next until the display shows Maintenance 5 Press Show The display shows System version 6 Press Next until the display shows Sys admin log 7 Press Show _ The display shows Items in log 8 Press Next and to move down or up the list of event codes 9 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 202 Maintenance System Administration Log Sys admin log Log item Time of log item Number of repetitions Time and date that log was checked Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Troubleshooting e Recording and reporting alarm codes 204 e Clearing lines 204 e Power failure 205 e Power fail telephone 206 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 204 Troubleshooting Recording and reporting alarm codes Occasionally y
279. te key to send Cancelling Call Forward 1 Press J 2 Enter the appropriate key to send Using the Transfer feature The Transfer feature allows you to transfer a call to an internal or external telephone Depending on how you have programmed your system you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to another exchange line Depending on the type of ISDN terminal you may have to press a service key to access feature services consult the instructions that came with your ISDN terminal P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 310 Feature quick reference 1 Press 7 0 J 2 Enter the number of the extension you want to transfer the call to followed by 3 Enter the appropriate key to send Cancelling Transfer Depending on the type of ISDN terminal you may have to press a service key to access feature services consult the instructions for your terminal 1 Press OJE 2 Enter the appropriate key to send Line access from an ISDN terminal Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as does a Norstar BST telephone To make an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal access an exchange line by entering a line pool code or a destination code Making or receiving calls involving two B channels For incoming calls that require two simultaneous B channels Compact Plus requires that calls be made sequentially to two distinct numbers rather than s
280. te keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 102 Programming capabilities 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press Next J The display shows Carabilities 8 Press Show _ The display shows Fud no answers 9 Press Next J twice The display shows CMD on buss 10 Press CHAHGE to choose Y yes or N No 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Programming Handsfree Norstar BST telephones allow you to make calls without using the telephone handset When Full Handsfree operation is programmed for a telephone a Handsfree Mute key is automatically assigned to the telephone Once a telephone has Full Handsfree you can also programme Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree allows you to make and receive Handsfree calls without pressing the Handsfree Mute key Note The T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute button The T7316E has separate buttons for both Handsfree and Mute located under the dial pad Once a telephone has Full Handsfree you can also programme Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree allows you to make and recei
281. tension lock to the extension you use to On nn A 11 12 13 programme the system There must be at least one two line display telephone in the system that has extension lock set to None or you will not be able to programme the system Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp extrs Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The displays shows nnn innr Press Show _ The display shows Line access Press Next _ until the display shows Restrictions Press Show The display shows Restrn filters Press Next The display shows Extn restrns Press Show _ The display shows Filters Press Next _ The display shows ExtnLock Press CHANGE to select None Full or Partial Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 94 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Preventing Last Number Redial Under some conditions a telephone may be used by customers or clients You can prevent non employees from accessing sensitive numbers by blocking certain features at the telephone The default setting allows an extension to use the Last Number Redial feature See Chart 8
282. the sdh key Enter the telephone number Internal autodial DSS 1 Press ra 2 2 Press the key you want to programme 3 Enter the telephone number P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 228 Customising your telephone Feature access key l Pres _ J amp B 2 Press the key you want to program 3 Press and the code you wish to programme Personal Speed Dial programming Press _ J9 1 2 Enter the speed dial code EF 4 Press the sdh key Enter the telephone number Ring Type programming l Press ra 6 2 Press 1 2 3 or 4 to select the Ring type desired 3 Press the sdh key M7000 T7000 tones Since the M7000 T7000 telephones do not have a display you will hear the following tones stuttered dialtone for Do Not Disturb and Call Forward single low frequency command input tone single high frequency confirmation tone The lamp shows a solid light if there is a message from a Direct Dial extension or a Voicemail message for M7000 T7000 telephones Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Using personal features e Background music 230 e Do Not Disturb 230 e Personal Speed Dial codes 231 e Using Speed Dial 231 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 230 Using personal features Background music If an externa
283. the AH display key 11 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal 12 Press CHAHGE to select a different route for the destination code 13 Enter the three digit code Absorb length Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed by the system and not used in the dialling sequence Begin with Hormal step 11 of the previous procedure 1 2 Press Show _ The display shows AbsorbLenath 3 Press CHAHGE 4 Select the number of digits to be absorbed 0 AIl or any number up to the length of the destination code 5 Press to exit or to programme the next schedule If a telephone number does not match any of the programmed destination codes the user must first decide which line to select and then dial the number To make this task simple and to ensure that all long distance calls are being routed consistently all area codes in the United Kingdom numbering plan should be programmed as destination codes Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Services 167 For example a destination code for Maidenhead might look like this e Destination code 01628 Normal route 003 AbsorbLength 0 e Route 003 DialOut No number Use Pool C A caller wishing to dial Maidenhead might dial 01628 237625 The system would recognise 01628 as a destination code It would select Pool C absorb no digits add no Dial Out digits and dial the remaining digits to complete the cal
284. the display shows System Frarming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show Srourt Enter the hunt group number you want to programme 1 to 6 Press Show The display shows Member extns Press Show The display shows the members for that group Press HOLE to move an existing member to another place within the hunt group The display shows the member number followed by an arrow Enter the new position number for the extension Press 48 to exit or Next _ to continue programming Assigning or unassigning lines to a group It is recommended to set the hunt group line Prime extension to None Doing so prevents delayed ring transfer of external hunt group calls to the Prime extension before the hunt group can receive the call You can assign a line to only one group 1 So A A Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press L 6 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 6 J 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ektns Press Next until the display shows System Farming Press Show The display shows Hunt Srours Press Show The display shows Show Srourt Enter the Hunt Group number you want to programme 1 6 Press Show The display shows Member extasi Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming Hunt groups 123 10 11 1
285. the line number 12 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal 13 Press CHAHGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the filter to be assigned as the line extension restriction for each schedule There are no default line extension restrictions 14 Press to quit or to continue programming Class of Service passwords Call barring shows you how to customise and apply dialling filters to restrict calls You can temporarily override these filters with a Class of Service COS password The COS passwords replace one set of filters with another to allow someone to make calls that would otherwise be restricted without giving them complete freedom to make every kind of call The COS passwords let you define individual passwords and determine the restriction filter and remote package associated with each A system can have a maximum of 100 six digit COS passwords ranging from 00 to 99 Each password consists of a user filter which replaces the current extension or line extension filter and a line filter which replaces the current line filter Your COS password is in effect only for the duration of your call and does not affect the restrictions placed on other users of the system The COS passwords for a system should be determined randomly and should be changed regularly Employee COS passwords should be deleted when they leave the company Typically each user has a separate COS password However several users can shar
286. the settings affect the correct operation of the system The first three steps of each procedure are provided to get to Terminals amp Extns on the telephone display and can be used to programme any individual item at any time However when you are programming the whole system once you have completed the first programming item it is not necessary to start at step 1 of the next procedure unless you leave programming Just press to move to the next item in the programming sequence While you are programming the system the display occasionally shows Uedate You can press the display key below the word to see what programming changes the system is undergoing Any procedure that specifies using the Administrator ADMIN password can also be accessed using the System Administrator Plus SAPLUS password P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 26 Programming overview SAPLUS Template PBX Square Hybrid Start Extension 221 Terminals amp Extns ow exin _ Line access Line assignment Show line _ Non DIA line L001 Ring only Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned DIA line L101 Ring only Appr amp Ring Appr only Unassigned Appearances 1 LinePool access Line pool A Y Line pool B N Line pool C N Prime line None PoolA Pool C Intem Intercom keys 2 0 to 8 Answer extns Show extn _ 221 Unassigned Appr amp Ring Appr only OLI Extn Capabilities Fwd no answer
287. them Greeting User recorded example or Source Used by pre recorded message if available italics feature A Company i SA greeting You have reached British Telecom User CCR B Business Our offices are closed Our business hours are closed 9 to 5 Monday to Friday User CCR Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Auto Attendant 195 Greeting User recorded example or pre recorded message if available italics Source Used by feature C Caller menu To reach sales press 1 to reach a receptionist press 0 User CCR D Thank you Cheers Thank you for calling User or Pre recorded CCR E Hold the line Wait a moment and someone will pickup Or hold the line and your call will be answered as soon as possible User or Pre recorded SA CCR F Dial the extension You can dial through if you know the extension number If you know the extension that you want and are using a touch tone phone please dial it now User or Pre recorded SA CCR G Operators busy We can t come to the phone right now All of our operators are busy User or Pre recorded SA Users have a total of 96 seconds of recording time to allocate to the seven possible recordings If a customer begins by recording a 15 second Company Greeting then there will be 96 15 81 seconds available for the other remaining
288. therwise have to be done manually including e entering a line pool code e dialling an access code for a long distance carrier accessing an alternate route if the Prime line is busy or unavailable Uniform numbering plan Compact Plus can be programmed to provide dialling transparency by using a uniform numbering plan For example a worker at the head office in London can call a colleague at a branch office in Birmingham as though they were calling an extension in their own office Dialling transparency depends on establishing a numbering plan where all extension numbers are unique and of a uniform length For example if you have three company sites two in London and one in Birmingham then all three sites should have the same number of digits in their extension numbers and each extension number should be unique When performing System Start up you can change the starting value and length of extension numbers as well as the Received number length If you apply the PBX template at System Start up received numbers and the Received number length are set automatically to match the extension numbers How Routing service works There are two headings for Routing service Routes and Dest codes Under Routes you programme DialOut and Use e Dial Out specifies the digits up to 24 to be dialled out to reach the called extension e Use defines a specific line pool to be used to make the call P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Pl
289. ting 271 WwW Wait for dialtone feature 300 Symbols 276 gt 275 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide
290. ting calls by distinctive ring patterns 234 Privacy feature external calls only 234 Answering the next queued call 235 Answering hunt group calls 235 Multiple appearances of DIA lines 236 Using SWCA line buttons 236 Using Handsfree 239 Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup 240 Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 241 Answer keys 242 Listening in a group 243 Disconnecting accidentally 243 Malicious call identification MCID 243 Holding calls 245 Holding 246 Listening on hold 247 Routing calls 249 Call Parking 250 DIA calls 251 Making a Priority call 253 Transferring acall 253 Transferring to a busy extension Call Camping 254 Making external calls 257 Using an exchange code 258 Using line pools 258 Making a conference call 259 Using Class of Service passwords 263 Making internal calls 265 Making an internal call 266 Making a conference call 266 Accessing a Direct Dial extension 266 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide viii Leaving messages 267 Paging 270 Remote paging 270 Voice call 271 Forwarding calls Forwarding all calls 274 External Call forward 275 Line redirection 276 Saving time with features Using System Speed Dial 280 Using Autodial 280 Using Redial 282 Programming memory keys 283 Using Ring Again 284 Using Hotline 285 Using display features Time and Date 288 Static Time 288 Call Duration Timer 288 Call Information 289 Call Log 290 A
291. to be excluded from this restriction Press ADD to add more overrides to this restriction Override BAL Press REMOWE to remove an override from this restriction f P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 320 Charts Chart 7 Remote Access Packages System pregrming SHOW Hunt Srours MEXT 4 times Remote access SHOW Fem access pkgs Press and enter pkg Press to see settings LineFool access Remote rage Remote admin and Remote monitor HEXT Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No RE AS Lee Press and enter line number Press CHANGE and enter remote package number Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Charts 321 Chart 8 Extension restrictions Terminals Extns SHOW Vv Show extn Enter extension number SHOh Line access i HEXT Carabilities HEXT 3 times Festrictions SHOW Festrn filters HEST Extn rester SHOW A HEST Press CHANGE to select None Full or Partial HEST Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No HET Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Allow saved ho i HEXT Press CHANGE to chooose between Yes and H No Allow recall HEST Press CHANGE to choose between Yes and H No Allow redirect P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 322 Charts Chart 9 Extension capabilities 1 T
292. tration shows the functions for the keypad key when entering letters P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 18 Introduction Keypad key press once for the letter D press twice for the letter E press three times for the letter F A press four times for the number 3 More about display keys Use the three display keys below the display on your telephone to set and select options Their function depends on the instruction that appears on the display directly above each key Some display instructions that you may see during programming are DOWH LIF or OE Display keys Contrast level 2 Display text Instructions for display keys DO Display keys CHD Starting a programming session As administrator the first steps in making any change to the Compact Plus system are always the same You must press the button and then press 2 6e e Ba 4 to access Configuration programming Jani 1 88am Press J Feature Press Joe 21616 814 4 CONFIG Password Press 2 a 6 4 6 ADMIN RETRY Press RETR to re enter the password if it is entered incorrectly Terminals Extns The display shows the first of the seven headings available for programming 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN is the password unless the password has been changed Check Programming Record for the most recent password Compact Plus System Administration Gui
293. types of Hospitality services feature passwords the Desk admin password and the Room condition password Setting the Desk admin password The Desk admin password is used to access all Hospitality Services admin features The default Desk admin password is EJP 4677 To change the default Desk admin password l ON a Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press C 0 NJ FE I G The display reads Passuord Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display reads Passwords Press Show _ The display reads COS Fsuds Press Next until the display reads Hosritalit s Press Show _ The display reads Desk rswdi467 7 Press the CHAHGE display key Enter a one to six digit number Press OK Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Passwords 175 Room condition password I RAD password The Room condition password controls the ability to change the room condition with 6 The default room condition password is None Different from the Desk admin password the room condition password can remain as None To change the default Room condition password 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press CJ OJN FJ i GJ The display reads Passwords 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows
294. u have sent You can send up to four messages to different extensions Each extension including the prime extension can receive up to four messages from different extensions but only one message from any one extension 1 Press Hal 2 Press SHOW to display your first sent message 3 Press HEXT to move through your sent messages Displays Cancel denied You have entered an invalid number when attempting to cancel a message In use 21 You are trying to call from your message waiting list The line that you are trying to use is being used by the identified Norstar user Message denied You have tried to send a message to an invalid extension number or to a telephone that is out of service Message list SHOW appears only if you have outstanding SHOW ACC EXIT messages Press SHOl to review messages you have sent Press ALL to send a new message Message to Enter the extension number of the telephone to which you want to send a message Messages amp Calls You have one or more messages and one MSG CALLS or more new Call Logs Press 6J to change the first line of the display to the current time and date Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Making internal calls 269 Ho key free You have no line key free with which to reply to a message Start of list Your are at the beginning of your list of HEXT messages Press HEXT to move through your messages Their list full You are trying to
295. uently called numbers using a three digit code For example you can programme telephone numbers for major suppliers or clients for easy dialling by everyone in the office Speed dial codes numbered from 001 to 255 are intended for system wide use Speed dial codes from 256 to 279 are for personal use and can be programmed differently at each extension See Changing a personal user speed dial code on page 113 for more information on the Speed dial feature The steps to programming System speed dial are e assign a number to a System speed dial code e select an outgoing facility to be used for the number e set whether the system displays the number or a name optional e set whether the speed dial number bypasses any restrictions on the line or extension where it is used optional See Chart 1 System Speed Dial on page 316 in Appendix A for a programming overview See also Using Speed Dial on page 231 Assigning a number to a System speed dial code First choose a three digit speed dial code from 001 to 255 and then assign a telephone number to it 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extns Press Next until the display shows Sys sreed dial Press Show The display shows SFeed dial Enter the System speed dial code 00
296. umber of rings before System Answer answers a call 192 e Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR greeting 192 e Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group 193 e Using the pre recorded greetings 194 e Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 194 e Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 196 e Programming or changing CCR destinations 197 e Testing your custom System Answer and CCR 197 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 188 Auto Attendant Auto Attendant The built in Auto Attendant automatically answers and directs incoming calls which can reduce or eliminate the workload for the person who answers incoming calls for an office The Auto Attendant carries out three tasks System Answer Custom Call Routing CCR and direct extension dialling The Auto Attendant can transfer calls to a hunt group The System Administrator enables the Auto Attendant for your Compact Plus and programs the lines answered by CCR The Auto Attendant is only enabled after you enter Software Keys supplied by BT See Software Keys on page 57 for information about this feature See Chart 23 Auto Attendant on page 334 in Appendix A for a programming overview System Answer The System Answer feature simplifies the job of answering calls by ensuring all calls are answered within a set number of rings When calls g
297. urier instead of the courier s telephone number System speed dial names can be 16 characters long The default displays the number Alpha tagging If you specify a name for a system speed dial and your system is set up for CLI display an incoming call on a number only CLI line that matches the system speed dial number will display whatever name you entered into the system speed dial name field This is referred to as alpha tagging You can determine how many digits of the incoming call and the number entered into the system speed dial must match before the system determines that the numbers are the same Refer to CLID Match on page 144 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extne 4 Press until the display shows Sys sreed dial P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 64 Setting System speed dial Press Show _ The display shows Sreed dial 6 Enter the System speed dial code 001 to 255 you want to use 7 Press until the display shows Disrlay digits 8 Press CHAHGE to choose N No No means the display shows a name for the code 9 Press Next _ The display shows Name Sys sd di Press to see the rest of the display 10 Press CHAHGE The display shows Hames 11 Enter the name you
298. us System Administration Guide 162 Services Under Dest codes you programme the destination route and AbsorbLength e Normal is for assigning the route code to be used during regular business hours e Absorb Length indicates how many of the digits in the destination code should be absorbed by the system not dialled out to reach the called extension When a caller dials a number Compact Plus checks the leading digits of the number against the destination codes If the leading digits are matched to a destination code Compact Plus proceeds to select the route containing the appropriate line pool and dial out digits It then adds the digits that the caller dialled minus the ones that are to be absorbed from the destination code In the following example a caller at extension 6625 in London wants to reach a colleague in Maidenhead Without the Routing service the caller would have to select a line and dial 01628 784221 to reach extension 4221 in Maidenhead Because the system has an appropriate route and destination code the caller simply dials 4221 The system recognises 4 as a destination code It checks destination code 4 which instructs it to use Dial Out 01628 78 and Line Pool A from Route 002 It is instructed not to absorb any digits from the destination code so it adds all of the caller s digits 4221 to complete the call Example of a simple route Extn 662 Extn 4221 Line pool A dialled digits 01628 7
299. utobumping 295 Special dialling features Special dialling features 298 Inserting a pause 298 Setting Long tones 298 Programmed Release 299 Recall 299 Run Stop 299 Wait for Dial Tone 300 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN services 302 Digital Network Adapter 304 Feature quick reference Compact Plus feature codes 306 ISDN terminal features 309 ATA extension features 311 Appendix A Programming overviews Charts Index 273 279 287 297 301 305 313 315 335 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 SECTION I System Administration P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Introduction e Safety and Regulatory information 12 e You must be the administrator 13 e Here s what you need to start programming 13 e Understanding the telephone keys 15 e Starting a programming session 18 e Ending a programming session 19 e Using passwords to access programming 19 e Understanding your system 20 e Map of Administrator Plus programming 20 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 12 Introduction Safety and Regulatory information Markings the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipmen
300. ve Handsfree calls without pressing the designated Handsfree key You can programme the type of Handsfree operation used with each telephone or activate Handsfree Answerback See Chart 10 Extension capabilities 2 on page 323 in Appendix A for a programming overview M7000 T7000 telephones or a telephone connected by an Note Handsfree is not available on the M7100N T7100 Analogue Terminal Adaptor See Using Handsfree on page 239 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Termninals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Programming capabilities 103 5 Enter the extension number of the extension you wish to programme The display shows nnn innr Press twice Press until the display shows Handsfree Press CHAHGE to choose Auto Std or None Press to exit or to continue programming nn SD ATTENTION The T7316E keystation must be set to Auto to allow the handsfree button work When a call is answered the keystation defaults to the last used answer method Programming Handsfree answerback Handsfree answerback allows you to answer a call without lifting the receiver It
301. vent a second call from ringing by assigning Do Not Disturb DND on Busy to your telephone When DND on Busy is turned on for the extension internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the telephone External callers are transferred to the Prime extension used in your system If you use DND on Busy the line indicator for an external incoming call still flashes but your telephone does not ring Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy If an external call uses a Direct Inward Access DIA line the call is processed according to the programming of the DIA line If there are no available appearances of the DIA line the caller will hear a busy tone Note When using DND on busy with M7100N T7100 or M7000 T7000 telephones there is no indication that a second call is ringing on your telephone Putting your first call on hold automatically answers the second incoming call If the extension is a member of a hunt group the DND on Busy feature overrides the hunt group This extension does not receive notification of hunt group calls while on a call See Do Not Disturb on page 230 for information on using this feature Setting and cancelling Do Not Disturb on Busy You can set or cancel DND on Busy for each extension according to personal preference The default is Y Yes DND on Busy is enabled except for extension 221 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropria
302. vice on page 329 in Appendix A for a programming overview 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals amp Extris 4 Press Next twice The display shows Services 5 Press Show The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next J The display shows Restrn service 7 Press Show _ The display shows Sched Hight 8 Press Show and use CHANGE to choose Manual Auto or Off 9 Press to exit or to continue programming Routing service Instead of having to manually decide which routes to use at different times of the day you can set the routes to automatically be selected according to the programmed settings for each of the six schedules Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Services 161 Designating alternate routes for calls The programming for Routing service decides what path an outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed When you select an internal line and dial the numbers you enter are checked against the routes If the number you dialled starts with a destination code the system uses the line pool and dials out digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code and then dials the number that you dialled Routing service replaces a number of tasks that o
303. vices 169 Assigning extensions to a control extension In addition to placing lines into Service modes a control extension can apply Restriction service dialling filters to other extensions l 12 13 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next _ until the display shows Services Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service Press Next until the display shows Common settings Press Show _ The display shows Control extns Press Show _ The display shows For lines Press Next _ The display shows For extn Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number The display shows the extension number followed by the current control extension Press CHAMGE and enter the extension number you want to assign as the control extension for this extension Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Changing the name of a schedule l Oe So A a 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassuardi Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows Services Press Show _ The display shows
304. vices feature Refer to Programming M7000 T7000 memory keys on page 227 for a detailed steps for programming the four memory keys on this telephone P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 218 About your system telephones Release key Pressing 4 ends a call You do not have to put the handset down also ends feature programming While you are on a call do not press to end a feature you are using If you do you disconnect the call Press instead Visually Impaired Operator Console The Compact Plus system supports a Visually Impaired Operator Console VIOC for the visually impaired attendant The VIOC provides computer based speech synthesis for the programming interface A VIOC consists of an M7324N telephone a CAPN module an IBM compatible PC a PCI B card a PC based voice synthesizer card and an analogue mixer card The PC uses the PCI B to obtain information from the Central Control Unit CCU and controls the voice synthesizer to generate audible prompts The synthesizer output is routed to a headset where it is coupled with the telephone call in progress enabling the operator to respond to the caller and to hear status information at the same time The PCI B is an add on card for the PC that allows applications running on the PC to access the Compact Plus D channel signalling and B 2 data channels The VIOC requires D channel signals The voice synthesizer card is an add on fo
305. vileges Restrictions 22 Enter the number of the AC15A private circuit 061 or 062 23 The displays shows the line number followed by Fem Fka Press CHAHGE 24 Enter the number of the remote package that you just created 25 Press to exit or to continue in programming Setting up a new COS password As the Administrator you set up the COS passwords You choose a password number the password and finally the user and line filters for your new Class of Service If you leave the user or line filter settings at Deflt the current filter is retained for this Class of Service You may assign a new filter to either the user or line filter or to both depending on your needs You must change at least one of them or your Class of Service is no different from ordinary service l A Ny 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 Z 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terninals amp extrs Press Next until the display shows Passwords Press Show The display shows COS Fauds Press Show The display shows Show Pswd 3 Enter an unused password number 00 to 99 The display shows COS Fwd followed by the number you chose Press The display shows Fswdriri and the current setting Press CHANGE Enter six digits for the new passw
306. ving one hour backward with BACK l 2 Press BACK The display shows Backward b a 1Hr Press YES The display briefly shows Time Changed Automatic Time amp Date When a Basic Rate Interface BRI outgoing call is answered the network may provide time and date information to the Norstar system The Auto Time amp Date feature enables the Norstar system to use this information to automatically update the time and date on the Norstar system l 0 SOO p p e Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 2 B 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terminals Estns Press Next until the display shows Sastem Frarmina Press Nex The display shows Featr settings Press Show _ The display shows Backarnd music Press Next until the display shows AutoTime Date Press CHANGE to choose Y or N Press to exit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Assigning a Direct Dial extension e Programming Direct Dial 76 e Programming an internal Direct Dial extension 76 e Programming an external Direct Dial extension 77 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 76 Assigning a Direct Dial extension Programming Direct Dial Direct Dial allows you to dial a designated telephone
307. w group k Show Member extns Hunt groups Snow F Next Line assignment Next F Next Mode Next F Next Hunt delay Sys speed dial Show F Next If busy Featr settings Show F Next Q Timeout PNA F Next Overflow Next F Next Name Fk Next Dstnct ring Passwords Show Direct dial PES Backgrnd music Next Hour F Next Inimi Haies On hold F Next Minutes F Next Receiver volume Time amp Date t Show H Next Year plex F Next Camp timeout Next Month F Next Park timeout Fk Next Day Auto Attendant Show F Next Park Mode Next F Next Trnsfr callbk Next F Next Trnsfr callbk System Prgrming Show P Next Netwk callbk Remote access i Shaw F Next Held reminder Next F Next Remind delay k Next Confrence tone Sys ID Next i Software keys Show Next Password F Next Directd pickup keys F Next Page tone Next Hospitality Show F Next Page Timeout Fk Next AutoTime amp Date F Next Call log space Manenanga bshow Fk Next Alarm Extn Fk Next Extn relocation Next F Next Answer Extn Next SWCA Cntris Usage Metrics gt Show System version F Next CLID Match F Next Clear lines Roam deskinis F Next Sys admin log F Show Show extn Auto attend Hunt Groups F Next Remote montr Next Call restrns k Show Attd Extn Fk Next Service time F Next System Answer F Next Alarm F Next CCR k Show Attn attempts F Show After F Next Retry intrvi F Next CCR lines F Next Attn duration F Next CCR Groups F Next Time format k Show Show group k Next CCRgrpi Note
308. want to give to the speed dial code Enter the name by pressing the appropriate key on the keypad until the first letter of the name is displayed Press gt then enter the next letter of the name and so on until the name is complete Up to 16 characters are allowed Press to add spaces 12 Press lt 8 to exit or to continue programming CLID name display When you specify a name for a system speed dial the system displays the name programmed on that speed dial when you receive a call from that number over a number only analogue line or target line If you do not specify a name then only the number or line will appear for the call depending on how the line was programmed match the system speed dial entry as defined under CLID match Note For name display to occur the calling number must also Refer to CLID Match on page 144 To program which display appears first on your telephone follow these steps 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassward 3 Press 7 2 7 6 6 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Ertrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr t 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows rnn innr 6 Press Show _ The display shows Line access 7 Press until the display shows Call Services Compact Plus System
309. warded from telephone 221 or you have an answer button for telephone 221 and an external call is ringing on that telephone P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 220 About your system telephones You may see the following displays when using a feature Line l transfer Lineg i waiting Ho calls waiting Ho line selected Hot in service Parked call CALLBACK Pick uF receiver Prioritse221 BLOCK Release a call Use line Fool VES HO Hold or release Release calls Line in use The call on line 001 is being transferred to you by someone else in your Compact Plus system A camped call is waiting Press the line button or use Call Queuing to answer the call Press if you have M7100N T7100 or M7000 T 7000 telephones You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone There is no call ringing at your telephone If you have a flashing line button but your telephone is not ringing press the line button to answer the call on that line The telephone to which you directed a call is not in service or is otherwise unavailable The call is returned to your telephone No one answered the call you parked The call has come back to you You have used the Call Queuing feature without picking up the receiver Auto Handsfree has not been assigned to your telephone You must use the receiver or press the key marked Handsfree Mute to answer a call You are rec
310. wering a telephone using Directed Pickup 240 e Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 241 e Answer keys 242 e Listening in a group 243 e Disconnecting accidentally 243 e Malicious call identification MCID 243 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide 234 Answering calls Answering a call When a call rings at the telephone pick up the handset or press the key marked Handsfree Mute to connect the call Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns When lines are configured on your system they can be assigned one of four distinctive ring patterns DRP The default for all telephones and lines is DRP 1 which is the highest priority Call ringing When multiple calls are presented to the telephone the call with the highest priority DRP setting will be the call that rings at the telephone Call answering When multiple calls are presented to a telephone and the user picks up the handset the call with the highest priority DRP setting is the call that is presented Note External calls always have a higher priority than internal calls Note If the ring type is changed on a telephone after the DRPs are set on the line the DRPs are overwritten by the telephone settings If the DRPs are set after telephone programming then the telephone ring programming is overridden by the DRP program Refer to Ring type on page 227 Privacy feature exte
311. wo tables show you how to set up destination codes with or without wild card characters Route Line Pool 555 0162 237 625 Line Pool C 565 0173 133 2211 Line Pool A Destination codes not using a wild card Destination Absorb Length Dial Out codes 0622 555 0162 237 6252 0623 555 0162 237 6253 0626 555 0162 237 6256 0627 565 All 0173 133 2211 0628 555 0162 237 6258 0629 555 0162 237 6259 Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Services 165 Destination codes using the ANY character Destination Absorb Dial Out codes Length 062 555 3 0162 237 625X where X is the final dialout digit from 1 to 9 but not 7 0627 0173 133 2211 Enter a destination code that is recognised when used as part of a telephone number for an outgoing call It can be up to seven digits long 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next until the display shows Serwices 5 Press Show _ The display shows Ringing service 6 Press Next J until the display shows Routing service 7 Press Show _ The display shows Routes 8 Press Next The display shows Dest codes 9 Press Show _ The display shows Show DstCode 10 If there are no codes defined use ADD the keypad and OK to e
312. words Admin 173 Basic 173 Call Log 291 erasing 178 I RAD 175 SAPLUS 172 using 29 PBX template T7316 buttons 214 T7316E buttons 211 Personal Speed Dial feature 231 Pickup group setting up 104 Prime line 42 Priority Call allowing 107 feature 253 Privacy 234 programming Call Log 294 Call Pickup 240 Control extensions 168 copying 147 Do Not Disturb on Busy 101 extensions 98 map of Administrator Plus programming 20 P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Guide Index 340 maps of 21 memory keys 283 overlay 14 programming basics entering passwords 18 programming system features Page timeout 140 Page tone 139 pulse dialling 300 Q queued call 235 R re allocating log space 140 Recall setting up 95 Receive tones 110 receiver volume programming 133 redialling a number 282 Redirect ring setting up 109 turning off 109 regulatory information 12 relocation of extension 146 Remind delay 137 Remote access defaults for packages 182 filter 89 packages 182 Remote paging 270 ring Ringing service 158 Ring Again cancelling 284 feature 284 ring pattern Hunt Group 123 Ring type changing 116 feature 227 Ring volume feature 227 Ringing service 158 activating 158 cancelling 158 feature 158 routing DIA calls 251 Routing service programming 161 Run Stop 299 S SAPLUS password 172 Saved Number Redial preventing 94 Sequential 124 Services Control extensions 168 Restriction service 158
313. ws Carabilities 7 Press Next J until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next until the display shows Disrlay cntrst 10 Press CHAHGE to choose 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Note You do not see any change in the display of the telephone you are using when you are programming User preferences from another telephone Changing the Ring type See Ring type on page 227 for information about using this feature 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password 3 Press 2 8 6 4 6 ADMIN The display shows Terninals amp extrs 4 Press Show _ The display shows Show extr 5 Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to programme The display shows rnn innr Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming User preferences 117 Press Show _ The display shows Carabilities 7 Press Next J until the display shows User Frefernces 8 Press Show _ The display shows Model followed by a five digit code 9 Press Next until the display shows Rina ture 10 Press CHANGE to choose 1 2 3 or 4 11 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming P0607114 Issue 01 Compact Plus System Administration Gui
314. ws you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your system Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space to all the telephones in your system There are 250 Call log spaces available in the system There are no spaces allocated by default Changing the space allocation using log defaults defines the log space available to all telephones in the system Any remaining unassigned log space is available in a log pool and can be reallocated under Terminals amp Extns Reallocating Call log space may destroy call log data at telephones that lose space See Call Log on page 290 for information on using the Call log feature Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming feature settings 141 Alarm extension ele ey a eS 11 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 6 B 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Password Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Next until the display shows System Frarming Press Show _ The display shows Hunt 9rours Press Next until the display shows Featr settings Press Show _ The display shows Back9rnd music Press Next _ until the display shows Call lod srace Press Show The display shows Reset all logs Press YES and use the key pad to enter the space allocation for the call l
315. y shows Terminals Exths 4 Press Next The displays shows Lines 5 Press Show The display shows Show line 6 Enter the line number 7 Press Show _ The display shows Hame 8 Press Next _ until the display shows Restrictions 9 Press Show _ The display shows Restrn filters 10 Press Next The display shows Line restrns 11 Press Show _ The display shows Hormal 12 Press CHAHGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned to the line for each schedule 13 Press C to quit or to continue programming Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions 85 The following table shows the default restrictions Default filters for extensions Schedule Resiriction filter Sched 1 Night Sched 2 Evening Sched 3 Lunch Sched oo Sheds oo Schede o This means for example that if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 21 they are automatically applied when the Night schedule is in use Assigning filters to a line extension Line extn restrns Line extension restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a specific line that can be used for outgoing calls at a specific telephone This type of filter replaces any line or extension restriction filters that might otherwise apply It restricts the numbers you can dial on a line but only from that telephone The same line on another telephone
316. y with support services for different products may want to have a hunt group dedicated to each product Support personnel handling Product A can be in one group and support personnel handling Product B can be in another group Incoming calls look for the next available extension in the group If no extension is available the hunt groups feature places the call in a queue or routes it to an overflow extension Under the hunt groups sub heading you programme e members of a group e member position in a group e the lines assigned to a group e the distribution of incoming calls e the length of time the system looks for available agents before sending the call to the overflow position e how the system handles calls if all agents are busy Note Do not programme videophones as members of a hunt group Hunt groups allow one B channel connection at a time and videophones use two B channels Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue O1 Programming Hunt groups 121 Adding or removing members from a group Compact Plus supports six hunt groups with a maximum of 60 members system wide Members of the group can be any Norstar BST extension DNA or ISDN extension An extension can be in multiple hunt groups but each occurrence increases the total number of members in the system There can be one appearance of the same hunt group on a set The extension number range for hunt groups is 315 to 320 The extension num
317. you enter a Maintenance session 1 2 5 Release all calls on your telephone Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press 2 6 8 4 M CONFIG The display shows Fasswordi Press 7 2 7 5 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Termninals amp extrs Press until the display shows Maintenance When necessary refer back to these five steps on how to begin a Maintenance programming session Only one person at a time can access a Maintenance session Compact Plus System Administration Guide P0607114 Issue 01 Maintenance 201 Checking the system version of the software System version tells you the version number of the system processor software found in the Feature cartridge The release version can be used to trace a software fault if one occurs Write the system processor version number in the maintenance records 1 Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone 2 Press 2 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword 3 Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns 4 Press Next _ until the display shows Maintenance 5 Press Show The display shows System version 6 Press Show _ The display shows the version number of the system processor 7 Write the system processor version number in the appropriate maintenance record 8 Press to exi
318. ystem Administration Guide 96 Barring calls and privileges Restrictions Preventing Redirect The default setting allows an extension to use the Redirect feature 1 Un Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on your programming telephone Press L 6 6 8 4 4 CONFIG The display shows Fassword i Press 7 2 7 6 8 7 SAPLUS The display shows Terminals Extns Press Show _ The display shows Show extn Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to programme The display shows nnn innr 6 Press T 8 9 Press Press Press 10 Press 11 Press 12 Press CHANGE to choose Y Yes or N No 13 Press 48 to exit or to continue programming Show Next Show Next Show Next The display shows Line access until the display shows Restrictions The display shows Restrn filters until the display shows Extn restrns The display shows Filters until the display shows Allow redirecti Compact Plus System Administration Guide PO607114 Issue 01 Programming capabilities e Programming an extension 98 e Setting Call Forward no answer 98 e Setting Call Forward on Busy 100 e Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy 101 e Programming Handsfree 102 e Programming Handsfree answerback 103 e Assigning a Pickup group 104 e Assigning a page zone 104 e

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Wiley InDesign CS4 For Dummies  T6700 Series CO2 Sensor Module Application Note  956 DRAFT VERSION all  ー組立完成図(各部の名称) - スタディデスク K  IAN 75633 E-Gitarrenset  Samsung ST600 Instrukcja obsługi  Accusplit 998-310 User's Manual  NetComm NB1 User's Manual  manual técnico  IFM6S10/20/30  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file